Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8000S printer User manual

L a r g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r

User Manual

ENG

Contents

Contents

Introduction

How to use th�s manual ....................................................................................1

About Th�s User Manual ..............................................................................................................1

HTML Vers�on of the Manual for Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................3

Printer Parts

1

7

Pr�nter parts ......................................................................................................7

Front ............................................................................................................................................7

Back ............................................................................................................................................9

Top Cover (Ins�de) .....................................................................................................................10

Carr�age ..................................................................................................................................... 11

Ink Tank Cover (Ins�de) ..............................................................................................................12

Control Panel .............................................................................................................................14

Stand .........................................................................................................................................16

Med�a Take-up Un�t (Opt�onal) ...................................................................................................17

Output Stacker ..........................................................................................................................18

Control Panel ..................................................................................................19

Turn�ng the Pr�nter On and Off ..................................................................................................19

Pr�nter Modes ............................................................................................................................21

Sw�tch�ng Modes .......................................................................................................................26

Pr�nter Menu Operat�ons ...........................................................................................................28

Ma�n Menu Operat�ons ..............................................................................................................30

Menu Structure ..........................................................................................................................35

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs ...................................................................................................................49

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs (Dur�ng Pr�nt�ng) .......................................................................................60

Submenu D�splay ......................................................................................................................63

Status Pr�nt ................................................................................................................................64

Hard D�sk ........................................................................................................71

Pr�nter Hard D�sk Operat�ons ....................................................................................................71

Saved Pr�nt Jobs .......................................................................................................................72

Sav�ng Pr�nt Jobs ......................................................................................................................74

Check�ng a L�st of Saved Jobs ..................................................................................................80

Pr�nt�ng Saved Jobs ..................................................................................................................85

Manag�ng Saved Jobs ...............................................................................................................91

Delet�ng Saved Jobs ...............................................................................................................109

Mod�fy�ng the Current Job (Delet�ng or Preempt�ng Other Jobs) ............................................ 115

Mod�fy�ng Personal Boxes ....................................................................................................... 119

Check�ng the Free Hard D�sk Space .......................................................................................129

Eras�ng all data on the pr�nter's hard d�sk ...............................................................................132

Opt�onal accessor�es ....................................................................................133

Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................133

Med�a Take-up Un�t..................................................................................................................133

Contents ��

Contents

IEEE 1394 (F�reW�re) Expans�on Board ..................................................................................134

Printer Specifications ....................................................................................135

Specifications ..........................................................................................................................135

Bas�c Env�ronmental Performance ..........................................................................................140

Pr�nt Area .................................................................................................................................141

Basic Printing Workflow 142

Pr�nt�ng procedure ........................................................................................142

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Rolls .................................................................................................142

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Sheets ..............................................................................................146

Pr�nt�ng Opt�ons Us�ng Rolls and Sheets ................................................................................149

Manually Load�ng Paper to the Pos�t�on for Pr�nt�ng ...............................................................150

Pr�nt�ng from W�ndows ............................................................................................................151

Pr�nt�ng from Mac OS X ...........................................................................................................152

Pr�nt�ng from Mac OS 9 ...........................................................................................................154

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) ...................................................................156

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) .................................................................158

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS 9) ..................................................................160

Cancel�ng pr�nt jobs ......................................................................................162

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from the Control Panel ..........................................................................162

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from W�ndows ........................................................................................163

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS X ......................................................................................164

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS 9 ......................................................................................166

Handling Paper 168

Paper ............................................................................................................168

Paper .......................................................................................................................................168

Types of Paper ........................................................................................................................169

Paper S�zes .............................................................................................................................175

Handl�ng rolls ................................................................................................178

Select�ng the Roll as the Paper Source ...................................................................................178

Sett�ng the Roll on the Roll Holder ..........................................................................................179

Remov�ng a Roll from the Roll Holder .....................................................................................181

Load�ng the Roll �n the Pr�nter .................................................................................................182

Remov�ng the Roll from the Pr�nter .........................................................................................186

Select�ng the Paper Type (Roll) ...............................................................................................188

Spec�fy�ng the Paper Length (Roll) ..........................................................................................189

Feed�ng Roll Paper Manually ..................................................................................................190

Detect�on of the Rema�n�ng Roll Paper ...................................................................................191

Cutt�ng the Lead�ng Edge of Roll Paper Automat�cally ............................................................192

Spec�fy�ng the Cutt�ng Method for Rolls ..................................................................................193

Reduc�ng Dust from Cutt�ng Rolls ...........................................................................................197

Spec�fy�ng the Ink Dry�ng T�me for Rolls ..................................................................................198

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................201

Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................205

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........206

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................208

�� Contents

Contents

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................209

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................210

Handl�ng sheets for paper feed slots ............................................................ 211

Select�ng the Sheet as the Paper Source ............................................................................... 211

Load�ng the Sheet �n the Pr�nter ..............................................................................................212

Select�ng the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................215

Remov�ng the Sheet ................................................................................................................216

Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................217

Manually Load�ng Paper to the Pos�t�on for Pr�nt�ng ...............................................................220

Output Stacker ..............................................................................................221

Us�ng the Output Stacker ........................................................................................................221

Stow�ng the Output Stacker .....................................................................................................226

Med�a take-up un�t ........................................................................................228

Med�a Take-up Un�t..................................................................................................................228

Med�a Take-up Un�t (Opt�onal) .................................................................................................229

Us�ng the Med�a Take-up Un�t (Opt�onal).................................................................................230

Enabl�ng the Take-Up Reel Funct�on .......................................................................................231

D�sabl�ng the Take-Up Reel Funct�on ......................................................................................231

Load�ng the Rew�nd Spool on the Med�a Take-up Un�t............................................................232

Remov�ng Pr�nted Documents from the Med�a Take-up Un�t (Opt�onal) ..................................239

Enhanced Printing Options 242

Pr�nt qual�ty and color sett�ngs ......................................................................242

Choos�ng a Paper for Pr�nt�ng .................................................................................................242

G�v�ng Pr�or�ty to Part�cular Graph�c Elements and Colors for Pr�nt�ng ...................................243

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows, Mac OS X) ................................................................247

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................249

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows, Mac OS X)..........................................................251

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................252

Printing Office Documents .......................................................................................................253

Adjust�ng the Color �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver ..................................................................................254

Pr�nt�ng �n Ideal Colors for L�ght �n the V�ew�ng Env�ronment ..................................................257

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome ..............................................................................................258

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (W�ndows) .........................................259

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS X) .......................................261

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS 9)........................................264

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (W�ndows) ............................................................267

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ..........................................................270

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................273

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (W�ndows) ....................................276

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (Mac OS X) ..................................278

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (Mac OS 9) ..................................281

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................284

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................286


Printing Office Documents (Windows) .....................................................................................291

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) ...................................................................................293

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9) ...................................................................................295

Contents ��

Contents

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows) ..................................................................................297

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................299

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................302

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (W�ndows) ............................................................................305

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................307

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................................310

Pr�nt�ng enlargements or reduct�ons .............................................................313

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze ............................................................................313

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...................................................................................314

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value.......................................................................315

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER ............................316

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........317

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (Mac OS X) ........319

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (W�ndows).....................................................321

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS X) ...................................................323

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS 9) ...................................................326

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .................................................................330

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...............................................................332

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS 9) ................................................................335

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ..........................................................338

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ........................................................340

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS 9) .........................................................343

Pr�nt�ng at full s�ze .........................................................................................346

Pr�nt�ng on Overs�zed Paper ...................................................................................................346

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................348

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................350

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................352

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS 9) ........................................................................355

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (W�ndows) ...............................................................................................358

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS X) ..............................................................................................360

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS 9) ..............................................................................................363

Borderless Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................365

Borderless Pr�nt�ng on Paper of Equ�valent S�ze .....................................................................365

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...............................................367

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................369

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................371

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................373

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS 9) ........................................................................376

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll (W�ndows) .......................................379

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...........................381

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS 9) ...........................384

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ......................387

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ....................389

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS 9) ....................392

Pr�nt�ng banners or at other non-standard s�zes ...........................................395

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng) .............................................395

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes ...................................................................................396

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (W�ndows) .................................................................397

�v Contents

Contents

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS X) ................................................................401

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS 9) ................................................................403

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; W�ndows) .............................406

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS X) ...........................410

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS 9) ...........................413

T�l�ng and mult�ple pages per sheet ..............................................................417

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other ........................................................................417

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously ......................................................................................419

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet ...........................................................................................420

Pr�nt�ng Posters �n Sect�ons ....................................................................................................421

Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................422

Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (Mac OS 9) .........................................................................................424

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (W�ndows) ......................................................426

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) ....................................................428

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (W�ndows) ....................................................................430

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS X) ..................................................................431

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS 9) ..................................................................433

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................435

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) .......................................................................437

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) .......................................................................440

Center�ng or�g�nals ........................................................................................443

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls .......................................................................................443

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets ....................................................................................444

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (W�ndows) .....................................................................445

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ...................................................................447

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................450

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (W�ndows) ..................................................................453

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) ................................................................455

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9) .................................................................457

Conserv�ng roll paper ....................................................................................460

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees ......................................................460

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns ......................461

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (W�ndows) ....462

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS X) ..464

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS 9) ...467

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (W�ndows) ....................................469

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ...................................471

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9) ...................................474

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs .................................................................................476

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ............................................................................................................476

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................477

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................479


Other useful sett�ngs .....................................................................................484

Pr�nt�ng W�th Watermarks ........................................................................................................484

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on .................................................485

Us�ng Favor�tes .......................................................................................................................486

Contents v

Contents

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng ..............................................................................................486

Pr�nt�ng from Photoshop ..........................................................................................................487

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals ................................................................................488

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ............................................................................489

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................490

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS 9) ..........................................................................492

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (W�ndows) ...............................494

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS X) .............................496

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS 9) .............................499

Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (W�ndows)......................................501

Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) ....................................503

Software 506

W�ndows .......................................................................................................506

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................506

Confirming Print Settings (Windows) .......................................................................................508

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) .......................................................................510

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (W�ndows) ............................................................... 511

Sett�ngs Summar�es D�alog Box (W�ndows) ............................................................................512

Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................513

Ma�n Sheet (W�ndows) ............................................................................................................515

Page Setup Sheet (W�ndows) .................................................................................................519

Layout Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................................521

Gray Adjustment Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................523

Favor�tes Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................524

Ut�l�ty Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................................525

Support Sheet (W�ndows) .......................................................................................................526

Dev�ce Sett�ngs Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................527

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals (W�ndows) ..............................................................528

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (W�ndows) .................................................................................530

�magePROGRAF Status Mon�tor (W�ndows) ...........................................................................533

�magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................................534

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................535

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................536

D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ......................................................................................................537

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ...................................538

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........540

Color Sett�ngs Sheet: Color (W�ndows) ...................................................................................542

Color Sett�ngs Sheet: Monochrome (W�ndows) ......................................................................548

Confirming the Print Image Before Printing .............................................................................550

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................551

Med�a S�ze Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) .............................................................................552

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........553

Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ..................................................................................555

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (W�ndows)............................................556

Mac OS X .....................................................................................................557

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................557

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................558

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................560

v� Contents

Contents

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ...................................................................561

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) .....................................................................562

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (Mac OS X) .............................................................563

Ma�n Pane (Mac OS X) ...........................................................................................................564

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................566

Ut�l�ty Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................................................568

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................569

Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................570

Support Pane (Mac OS X) .......................................................................................................571

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................571

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................572

�magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor (Mac�ntosh) .............................................................................575

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS X) .................................577

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................578

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) ......................................................................580

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................581

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS X) ..........................................582

Mac OS 9 ......................................................................................................583

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS 9) ..........................................................................................583

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................................584

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................586

Ma�n Pane (Mac OS 9) ............................................................................................................587

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................................589

F�n�sh�ng Pane (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................................................591

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) .........................................................................................592

Dev�ce Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................................................593

Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................................594

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................................................595

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) ................................................................................597

�magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor (Mac�ntosh) .............................................................................600

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS 9) ..................................602

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) ..................................................................................604

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................607

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................609

Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................610

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS 9) .......................................... 611

Network Setting 612

Network Sett�ng ............................................................................................612

Network Env�ronment ..............................................................................................................612

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ...............................................................................614

In�t�al�z�ng the Network Sett�ngs ..............................................................................................615

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings .................................................................616

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ...................................................618

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ...............................................619

Spec�fy�ng Pr�nter-Related Informat�on ....................................................................................621

Us�ng RemoteUI ......................................................................................................................622

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur .................................................623

Contents v��

Contents

Network Sett�ng (W�ndows) ..........................................................................624

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings ...............................................................624

Spec�fy�ng the Pr�nter's Frame Type ........................................................................................626

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Pr�nt Serv�ces ..........................................................................................628

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Protocols .................................................................................................631

Configuring NetWare Network Settings ...................................................................................633

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) .............................................................634

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................635

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................636

Network Sett�ng (Mac�ntosh) .........................................................................637

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings .............................................................637

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh) ...........................................................638

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh) .............................................639

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh) .................................................643

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh) ................................................647

Maintenance 649

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead .................................................................................649

Correct�ng Pr�nt M�sal�gnment .................................................................................................649

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Automat�cally ....................................................................649

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Manually ...........................................................................651

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead He�ght ................................................................................................653

Adjust�ng the feed amount ............................................................................654

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Automat�cally ...............................................................................654

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Manually ......................................................................................657

Adjust�ng the Vacuum Strength ...............................................................................................660

Adjust�ng the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy ...........................................................661

Color adjustment ...........................................................................................663

Us�ng Color Cal�brat�on to Adjust Colors .................................................................................663

Pr�nt�ng �n Ideal Colors for L�ght �n the V�ew�ng Env�ronment ..................................................666

By select�ng color tones on Charts before pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................667

Pr�nt�ng �n Colors Match�ng the Measured Amb�ent L�ght ........................................................671

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ...................................674

Ink Tanks .......................................................................................................676

Ink Tanks .................................................................................................................................676

Replac�ng Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................677

Check�ng Ink Tank Levels ........................................................................................................689

When to Replace Ink Tanks .....................................................................................................690

Pr�ntheads .....................................................................................................691

Pr�nthead .................................................................................................................................691

Check�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty .......................................................................................................691

Improv�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty ......................................................................................................691

Check�ng for Nozzle Clogg�ng .................................................................................................692

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................693

Replac�ng the Pr�nthead ..........................................................................................................694

v�� Contents

Contents

Cutter Un�t .....................................................................................................702

Cutter Un�t ...............................................................................................................................702

Replac�ng the Cutter Un�t ........................................................................................................702

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .................................................................................705

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................705

Replac�ng the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .....................................................................................705

Check�ng the Rema�n�ng Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge Capac�ty .....................................................713

When to Replace the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .........................................................................714

Clean�ng the Pr�nter ......................................................................................715

Clean�ng the Pr�nter Exter�or ...................................................................................................715

Clean�ng Ins�de the Top Cover ................................................................................................717

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................720

Other Ma�ntenance .......................................................................................721

Prepar�ng to Transfer the Pr�nter .............................................................................................721

Updat�ng the F�rmware ............................................................................................................727

Troubleshooting 728

Frequently Asked Quest�ons .........................................................................728

Frequently Asked Quest�ons ...................................................................................................728

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver .....................................................................................730

Pr�nt�ng does not start ...................................................................................731

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not l�ght up ............................................................731

The Pr�nter Does Not Respond Even �f Pr�nt Jobs are Sent ....................................................731

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink ......................................................731

Cannot pr�nt over a network ..........................................................................732

Cannot connect the pr�nter to the network ..............................................................................732

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually .....................................................................733

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ........................................................................................734

Cannot pr�nt over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ...................................................................735

Cannot pr�nt over a NetWare network .....................................................................................736

The pr�nter stops dur�ng a pr�nt job ...............................................................737

An error message �s shown on the D�splay Screen .................................................................737

The pr�nter ejects blank, unpr�nted paper ................................................................................737

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty .................................................................738

Pr�nt�ng �s fa�nt .........................................................................................................................738

Paper rubs aga�nst the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................739

The edges of the paper are d�rty .............................................................................................740

The surface of the paper �s d�rty ..............................................................................................741

The back s�de of the paper �s d�rty ..........................................................................................741

Band�ng �n d�fferent colors occurs ...........................................................................................741

The contrast becomes uneven dur�ng pr�nt�ng ........................................................................742

Colors �n pr�nted �mages are uneven .......................................................................................742

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty caused by the type of paper ..............................................743

L�nes are m�sal�gned ...............................................................................................................743

Contents �x

Contents

The length of pr�nted �mages �s �naccurate ..............................................................................743

Documents are pr�nted �n monochrome ..................................................................................743

Pr�nted colors are �naccurate ...................................................................................................744

Image Edges are Blurred or Wh�te Band�ng Occurs ...............................................................745

Documents are pr�nted crooked ..............................................................................................745

L�ne th�ckness �s not un�form (W�ndows) .................................................................................745

Installat�on problems .....................................................................................746

The IEEE 1394 Dr�ver Cannot Be Installed Correctly ..............................................................746

Remov�ng Installed Pr�nter Dr�vers ..........................................................................................747

Clear�ng jammed paper ................................................................................748

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................748

Clear�ng a Jammed Sheet .......................................................................................................752

If the Pr�nter makes a strange sound ............................................................755

If the Pr�nter Makes a Strange Sound .....................................................................................755

Other problems .............................................................................................756

The pr�nter consumes a lot of �nk ............................................................................................756

A message to check the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge �s not cleared after you replace the

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................756

Paper �s not cut neatly .............................................................................................................756

Paper cannot be cut ................................................................................................................757

The pr�nter does not go on ......................................................................................................757

Roll paper cannot be �nserted �nto the Paper Feed Slot ..........................................................757

Cannot Load Sheets ................................................................................................................757

The Med�a Take-up Un�t Cont�nues Rotat�ng ...........................................................................758

Ink level detect�on ....................................................................................................................759

Error Message 761

Respond�ng to Messages .............................................................................761

Respond�ng to Messages ........................................................................................................761

Error Messages .......................................................................................................................763

Messages regard�ng paper ...........................................................................765

Paper M�smatch ......................................................................................................................765

Papr Type M�smatch ................................................................................................................765

Papr S�ze M�smatch ................................................................................................................766

Th�s paper cannot be used. .....................................................................................................766

Insufficient paper for job ..........................................................................................................767

No sheets. ...............................................................................................................................767

Regular pr�nt�ng �s selected, but a roll �s loaded. .....................................................................768

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................768

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected. ..........................................................................................................768

Sheet pr�nt�ng �s selected. .......................................................................................................768

Borderless pr�ntng not poss�ble. ..............................................................................................769

Paper loaded askew. ...............................................................................................................770

Paper s�ze not detected. ..........................................................................................................771

Lead�ng edge detect�on error. ..................................................................................................771

End of paper feed. ...................................................................................................................771

x Contents

Contents

Cannot feed paper. ..................................................................................................................771

Paper jam. ...............................................................................................................................771

Cannot cut paper. ....................................................................................................................772

Rel lever �s �n wrong pos�t�on. ..................................................................................................772

The roll �s empty. .....................................................................................................................773

Rew�nd�ng error. ......................................................................................................................773

Turn on the med�a take-up un�t. ...............................................................................................773

Med�a take-up un�t ready. ........................................................................................................773

Messages regard�ng �nk ................................................................................774

Ink Level: Check ......................................................................................................................774

No �nk tank loaded. ..................................................................................................................774

Ink insufficient. .........................................................................................................................775

Ink tank �s empty. Please OK and replace the �nk tank. ..........................................................775

Ink tank �s empty. .....................................................................................................................775

Close Ink Tank Cover ..............................................................................................................776

Ink tank error. ..........................................................................................................................776

Rema�n�ng level of the �nk cannot be correctly detected. ........................................................776

Messages regard�ng pr�nt�ng or adjusment ...................................................777

Use another paper. ..................................................................................................................777

Cannot execute th�s command. Use other paper. ...................................................................777

Cannot print as specified. ........................................................................................................777

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................777

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................778

Excess�ve temperature or hum�d�ty..........................................................................................778

Cannot cal�brate. .....................................................................................................................778

Messages regard�ng pr�ntheads ...................................................................779

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................779

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................779

x pr�nthead needs clean�ng. (x �s Left or R�ght) .......................................................................779

PHeads: wrong pos. ................................................................................................................779

Problem w�th Pr�nthead x (x �s L, R, or LR) .............................................................................780

x pr�nthead error (x �s Left or R�ght) .........................................................................................780

Messages regard�ng the ma�ntenance cartr�dge ..........................................781

No ma�ntenance cartr�dge. ......................................................................................................781

Prepare for ma�nt cart replacement. ........................................................................................781

No Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge capac�ty.........................................................................................781

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge full. ......................................................................................................781

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge problem. ..............................................................................................781

Messages regard�ng the hard d�sk ................................................................782

Ma�l box nearly full. ..................................................................................................................782

Ma�l box full. Now pr�nt�ng w�thout sav�ng data. .......................................................................782

Ma�l box full. Cannot save. ......................................................................................................782

Ma�l box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume pr�nt�ng. .............................782

Ma�l box full. Delete unwanted data ........................................................................................782

Hard d�sk error. ........................................................................................................................783

F�le read error. .........................................................................................................................783

Contents x�

Contents

Other Messages ...........................................................................................784

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ...................................................................................784

Top cover �s open. ...................................................................................................................784

Carr�age Cover �s open. ..........................................................................................................784

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ..............................................................784

Unknown file. ...........................................................................................................................785

Prepare for parts replacement. ................................................................................................785

Parts replacement t�me has passed. .......................................................................................785

Mult�-sensor error ....................................................................................................................785

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ...........................................785

x�� Contents

How to use this manual

Introduction

How to use this manual

About This User Manual

• Symbols

The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions or precautions in use.

Important Indicates important information that must be followed when using the printer. Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or operating errors.

Caution

Note

Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or damage to equipment or property. To ensure safe use, always follow these precautions.

Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on particular topics.

• Button names and user interface elements

Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Control Panel Buttons Example: Press the OK button.

Control Panel Interface Items and Messages Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.

Example: Click OK .

Software Interface Items

(Menus and Buttons)

Keyboard Keys Example: Press the Tab key.

• Part Names

Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Printer part names Example: Open the Top Cover .

Introduction 1


• Cross-reference

Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Cross-Reference in the Same User Manual Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.

(→P.19)

Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.

Cross-Reference in Related Manuals

Other Cross-Reference

Example: See the Paper Reference Guide .

Example: See the printer driver help.

• Figures and software screens

• Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.

• Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates.

• Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.

• Trademarks

• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon

Inc.

• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

• Copyright

© 2007 Canon Inc.

• Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.

• May we request

Thank you for understanding the following points.

• The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.

• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, please contact us.

2 Introduction


HTML Version of the Manual for Printing

For your convenience when printing this manual, HTML versions of the sections in “Using the Printer” on the top page are available. All topics in a section are combined in one le for printing. This section describes how to print sections of the manual, using the content of Printing Procedure in Basic Printing Workow as an example.

1.

On the top page, click Basic Printing Workow.

2.

Under Basic Printing Workow in the left frame, click Printing Procedure.

Introduction 3


3.

In the title area of Printing Procedure, click Access to the HTML for printing.

An HTML version of the topics in Printing Procedure is displayed, suitable for printing.

4 Introduction


4.

Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.

• Windows

In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link. In the shortcut menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

• Macintosh

On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.

Introduction 5


5.

Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).

• Windows

• Macintosh

Note

• To print “Software” on the top page or individual topics that are displayed, follow steps 4 and 5.

6 Introduction

Printer parts

Printer Parts

Printer parts

Front

a. Top Cover

Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed. (→P.10) b. Cutter Groove

Paper is cut (using the cutter or manually with scissors) over this groove.

c. Ejection Guide

Guides printed documents as they are ejected. Open this guide when loading a roll.

d. Roll Holder Slot

Slide the Roll Holder into this slot.

e. Roll Holder

Load the roll on this holder.

f. Ejection Support

Prevents printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or Paper Feed Slot.

g. Output Stacker

A cloth tray that catches ejected documents. (→P.18) h. Paper Feed Slot

When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll paper here.

i. Holder Stopper

Secure the roll on the Roll Holder with this part.

j. Ink Tank Cover

Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (→P.12) k. Control Panel

Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.14)

Printer Parts 7

Printer parts l. Release Lever

Releases the Paper Retainer. Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper.

m.Maintenance Cartridge

Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning. (Replace the cartridge when it becomes full.) n. Carrying handles

When carrying the printer, have four people hold it by these handles under both sides.

o. Maintenance Cartridge Cover

Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

p. Stand

A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving the printer. (→P.16)

8 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Back

a. Carrying handles

When carrying the printer, have four people hold it by these handles under both sides.

b. Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet

Connect the power cord of the optional Media Take-up Unit here.

c. Expansion Board Slots

Install an optional IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board, as desired.

d. Ethernet Port

Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer.

e. USB Port

Connect a USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with USB 2.0 High Speed mode.

f. Accessory Pocket

Holds printer manuals, assembly tools, and other items.

g. Power Supply Connector

Connect the power cord to this connector.

Printer Parts 9

Printer parts

Top Cover (Inside)

a. Top Cover Roller

Prevents paper from rising when ejected.

b. Paper Alignment Line

Align paper with this line when loading it.

c. Carriage

Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (→P.11) d. Carriage Shaft

The Carriage slides along this shaft.

e. Paper Retainer

Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.

f. Platen

The Printhead moves across the platen to print. The Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.

g. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves

These grooves catch ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.

h. Cleaning Brush

When cleaning inside of the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.

i. Fixed Blade

The Cutter Unit passes through this blade to cut paper.

10 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Carriage

a. Carriage Cover

Protects the Carriage.

b. Printhead Fixer Cover

Holds the Printhead in place.

c. Printhead L

Equipped with ink nozzles. Printheads serve a key role in printing.

d. Printhead R

Equipped with ink nozzles. Printheads serve a key role in printing.

e. Printhead Fixer Lever

Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.

f. Cutter Unit

A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting. The cutter blade is retracted inside when not cutting.

g. Shaft Cleaner

Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty.

Printer Parts 11

Printer parts

Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

Left Side Right Side

Note: The gure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank.

a. Ink Tank

Cartridges of ink in each color.

b. Ink Tank Lock Lever

A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and lower the lever when replacing an Ink

Tank. To open it, lift the stopper of the lever until it stops, and then push it down toward the front.

To close it, push it down until it clicks into place.

c. Accessory Box

For storing the included CDs, extra printheads, and other supplies.

a. Ink Color Label

Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.

12 Printer Parts

Printer parts b. Ink Set

Indicates how to replace the Ink Tank. An Ink Tank (→P.676) that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “F” in a black circle on the side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “F” is printed on the label.

c. Ink Lamp (Red)

Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.

• On

The Ink Tank is installed correctly.

• Off

No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.

• Flashing Slowly

Not much ink is left.

• Flashing Rapidly

Ink tank is empty.

Printer Parts 13

Printer parts

Control Panel

a. Online Button (Green)

Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.26)

• On

The printer is online.

• Flashing

The printer is switching modes.

• Off

The printer is ofine.

b. Menu Button

Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.49) c. Data lamp (Green)

• Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.

Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.

• Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

d. Message lamp (Orange)

• On

A warning message is displayed.

• Flashing

An error message is displayed.

• Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

e. Paper Source Section

After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.

1.

Roll Media lamp (Green)

• On

Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.

• Off

Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.

2.

Cut Sheet lamp (Green)

• On

Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.

• Off

Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.

f. Feeder Selection Button

Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.

14 Printer Parts

Printer parts g. Display Screen

Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.

h. Color Label

This label indicates the Ink Tank color. The label corresponds to the ink level on the Display Screen.

i. HDD lamp (Green)

• On

Indicates the printer is accessing the hard disk.

• Off

Indicates the printer is not accessing the hard disk.

j. ◄ Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.

k. ▲ Button

Ofine: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.190)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.

l. ▼ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.

(→P.190)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.

m.► Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.

n. OK Button

In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.

o. Information Button

Displays printer submenus. Press this button to display information about ink, paper, and so on.

(→P.63)

You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).

p. Power Button

Turns the printer on and off. (→P.19) q. Load/Eject Button

By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.

r. Stop Button

Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.

Note

• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.

Printer Parts 15

Printer parts

Stand

a. Stand L

The left leg of the Stand.

b. Stand R

The right leg of the Stand.

c. Top Stand Stay

Supports Stand L and Stand R. Attach the optional Media Take-up Unit to this part.

d. Bottom Stand Stay

Supports Stand L and Stand R.

e. Leg Covers

Covers for Stand L and Stand R.

f. Stopper

Locks the Stand casters.

Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while a Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the oor.

16 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Media Take-up Unit (Optional)

■Main Unit a. Left Media Take-up Unit

Load the Rewind Spool here.

b. Right Media Take-up Unit

Load the Rewind Spool here. Includes the Media Take-up Unit Power button, ▲ and ▼ buttons to advance or rewind paper, and a power cord.

c. Rewind Spool

Winds documents printed on rolls.

d. 3-inch Adapter

When rewinding rolls with 3-inch paper cores, attach the adapter to the Rewind Spool.

e. Media Take-up Sensor

A sensor for automatically rewinding rolls.

■Weight a. Weight Roll (6)

Weights required when rewinding rolls. Use one roll or combine two (with a Weight Joint ), depending on the roll width.

b. Weight Joint

Fastens two Weight Rolls.

c. Weight Flange (2 Sets)

Attached to the ends of Weight Roll to adjust the weight. Use Weight Flange 1 or Weight Flange

2, depending on the type of paper. (→P.232)

Printer Parts 17

Printer parts

Output Stacker

a. Output Stacker

A cloth tray that catches ejected documents. (→P.221) b. White tag

A point of reference for attaching the Output Stacker in the right direction.

c. Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L

Holds the Basket Rod (tag side) attached to the Output Stacker. When the Output Stacker is not used, push it down and store it next to the Stand Leg.

d. Basket Rod (tag side) and Basket Rod (cord side)

Holds the cloth Output Stacker securely in specic positions.

e. Basket Rod

Keeps Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L at the same angle.

f. Rod Holder

Holds the middle of the Basket Rod (cord side).

18 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Turning the Printer On and Off

Turning the printer on

1.

Press the Power button to turn on the printer.

The printer will now start up.

After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.

Control Panel

2.

The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper source section lamp remain lit.

The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.

• The Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover.

• The Ink Tank Cover is open

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

• The Printhead is not installed

Please see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.694)

• Ink Tank is not installed

Please see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.677)

• “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen

Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.

• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display

Screen

Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.

• No paper is loaded

Load paper. (→P.142) (→P.146)

Important

• Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.

Printer Parts 19

Control Panel

Turning the printer off

Important

• Never disconnect the printer’s power supply or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.

1.

Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.763)

If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after printing is nished.

2.

Hold down the Power button for more than a second.

After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.

20 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Printer Modes

Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.

• Modes (→P.21)

• Mode transition (→P.22)

• Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.23)

• Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.24)

• Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)

• Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)

Modes

The printer has ve modes as follows:

• Online

The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.

• Ofine

Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being processed.

While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.

The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.

• Menu mode

Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.

• Submenus

Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.

• Sleep mode

The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.49)

If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the printer goes online and prints the jobs.

Printer Parts 21

Control Panel

Mode transition

The printer mode transitions are as follows:

*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return to the previous mode.

*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.

*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.

22 Printer Parts

Online, and state of the Control Panel

Not printing

Printing in progress (receiving or processing print jobs)

Control Panel

Display Screen

• Top Level of the Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.763)

• Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

• Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.689)

Control Panel

• Online lamp

Lit when the printer is online.

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.

• Message lamp

Lit when warning messages are displayed.

Printer Parts 23

Control Panel

Ofine, and state of the Control Panel

Ofine

Not printing Printing is paused

Display Screen

• Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.763)

• Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

• Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.689)

Control Panel


Lit when warning messages are displayed.

Error Messages

If action can be taken If no action can be taken

• Top and Middle Levels of the Display Screen

Error messages are displayed.

• Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated.

(→P.689)


Error messages are displayed.

• Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

The corrective actions are displayed here.


The error message is displayed with the following instructions:

Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

• Display Screen

“ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received.


Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Take action as needed. (→P.763)

• Data lamp

Flashes when print jobs are being received.


Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.

If the message is still displayed after this, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact the Canon dealer for assistance.

24 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Main menu Menu items and settings Main menu (during printing)

• Display Screen

Pressing the Menu button when printing is not in progress displays the main menu.

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menus immediately under the current menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. (→P.30)

• Display Screen

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menu items or settings are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. (→P.30)

The menu of options available during printing (top gure) can be displayed by pressing the ► button when the main menu is displayed (left gure).

• Display Screen

Menus available during printing are displayed if you press the

Menu button during printing.

If you select a menu, the title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menus immediately under the current menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines.

The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. (→P.30)

Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Remaining Maintenance

Cartridge capacity and ink levels

Information of the loaded paper Printer information

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information. (→P.63)

Printer Parts 25

Control Panel

Switching Modes

Switching the Printer Online/Ofine

Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.

The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.

The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.

Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.

Printer Status When the Online Button is Pressed

Online The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes off.

Online, printing Switches ofine and printing is paused.

When printing is paused, the Printing menu is available.

Ofine

Ofine, when an error message is displayed

Menu mode

Menu mode, printing

If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online and the Online lamp is lit.

In the case of error messages other than those shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer remains ofine until you solve the problem. The

Online lamp remains off.

If the following error messages are displayed, the printer switches online and printing is resumed.

• Insufcient paper for job

• PHead needs cleaning.

• Papr Size Mismatch

• Papr Type Mismatch

If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online and the Online lamp is lit.

Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.

Printing is resumed.

26 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Switching to Menu Mode

Press the Menu button to display the main menu.

Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.

Printer Status When the Menu Button is Pressed

Online Switches to Menu mode.

Online, printing

Ofine

Ofine, printing

Either menus available during printing or a screen to manage print jobs is displayed. If you select a menu, the printer switches to that menu mode.

Switches to Menu mode.

Menus available during printing are displayed.

Ofine, when an error message is displayed Not switch to Menu mode until the problem is solved.

Press the Information button to display the submenus.

Press the Information button to display the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, as well as information on the loaded paper and the printer. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the information displayed. (→P.63)

Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ve seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Note

• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.

(→P.693)

Printer Parts 27

Control Panel

Printer Menu Operations

The printer menu includes a main menu and submenus.

• Main menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P.28)

• Main menu operations during printing (→P.28)

• Submenu operations (→P.29)

Main menu operations when no print job is in progress

Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel.

Note

• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed:

Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.

The following operations are available from the main menu.

• Paper settings

• Print settings

• Printer settings

• Job management

For a description of specic items available in the main menu, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)

Note

• By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.

Main menu operations during printing

After pressing the Online button during printing to pause printing, if you press the Menu button on the

Control Panel, only the menu options you can execute during printing ( Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj.,

Information, and Job Mgmt Menu ) are displayed.

Note

• The main menu will not be displayed during printing in the following case even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed:

Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.

The following operations are available from the main menu during printing.

• Printhead cleaning

• Manual adjustment of the paper feed amount

• Display of printer-related information

• Job management

For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings

(During Printing)”. (→P.60)

For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items during printing, see “Main Menu Operations”.

(→P.30)

28 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Submenu operations

Access submenus by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following information in submenus.

• Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity

• Ink levels

• Information on the loaded paper

• Printer information

For a description of specic items displayed in submenus, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.63)

Printer Parts 29

Control Panel

Main Menu Operations

Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

• Main menu (displayed if you press the Menu button when printing is not in progress)

• Menu selection (if you press the Menu button when printing is in progress)

Note

• The main menu will not be displayed in the following cases even if you press the Menu button.

• An error message is displayed

You can access the Menu mode after you have solved the problem.

To access each function menu from the main menu, and set or execute menu items, use buttons on the

Control Panel.

The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.

• Accessing Menus (→P.31)

• Specifying menu items (→P.32)

• Specifying numerical values (→P.33)

• Executing menu commands (→P.34)

30 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Accessing Menus

Printer menus are grouped by function.

Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.

• Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the menu list are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. Items you select are highlighted.

The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.

• The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. To access these lower level menus, select a menu and press ►.

• The upper level menus are available if “◄” is displayed at left. To access these upper level menus, select a menu and press ◄.

Printer Parts 31

Control Panel

Specifying menu items

Follow the steps below to specify menu items.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.

The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.

After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.

3.

Press the Online button to bring the printer online.

Note

• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.

32 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Specifying numerical values

Follow the steps below to enter numbers for items such as network settings.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network.

7.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue entering numbers.

8.


Note

• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.

Printer Parts 33

Control Panel

Executing menu commands

Follow the steps below to execute menu commands.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.

After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, the printer commonly reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.

34 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu Structure

Main Menu

The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.

For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)

For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

Paper Cutting (*1) No *

Rep. Ink Tank

Yes

No *

Head Cleaning

Media Menu

Yes

Head Cleaning A *

Head Cleaning B

Auto Feed (*11) No *

Yes

Take-up Reel (*9) Disable *

Enable

Cut Sheet Type Plain Paper (*5)

Plain Paper HQ

(*5)

Plain Paper HG

(*5)

Recycled Coated

(*5)

Coated Paper (*5)

HW Coated (*5)

Ex HW Coated (*5)

Premium MatteP

(*5)

Glossy Photo (*5)

Semi-Gl Photo (*5)

HW GlossyPhoto2

(*5)

HW SemiGlPhoto2

(*5)

Poster Semi-Gl

(*5)

Syn. Paper (*5)

Adh. Syn. Paper

(*5)

Backlit Film (*5)

Printer Parts 35

Control Panel

First Level

Roll Media Type

(*1)

Second Level Third Level

Backprint Film (*5)

Flame-Res.Cloth

(*5)

Fabric Banner (*5)

ThinFab.Banner

(*5)

Proong Paper

(*5)

News Proof 1 (*5)


FineArt Photo (*5)

FneArt HW Photo

(*5)

FineArt Txtr (*5)

FineArt Wtrclr (*5)

FineArtBlockP (*5)

Canvas Matte (*5)

JPN Paper Washi

(*5)

Colored Coated

(*5)

CAD Trace Paper

(*5)

CAD Matte Film

(*5)

CAD Clear Film

(*5)

Special # Here, the number is 1-10 (*5)

Plain Paper (*5)

Plain Paper HQ

(*5)

Plain Paper HG

(*5)

Recycled Coated

(*5)

Coated Paper (*5)

HW Coated (*5)

Ex HW Coated (*5)

Fourth Level

36 Printer Parts

Fifth Level

First Level Second Level Third Level

Premium MatteP

(*5)

Glossy Photo (*5)

Semi-Gl Photo (*5)

HW GlossyPhoto2

(*5)

HW SemiGlPhoto2

(*5)

Poster Semi-Gl

(*5)

Syn. Paper (*5)

Adh. Syn. Paper

(*5)

Backlit Film (*5)

Backprint Film (*5)

Flame-Res.Cloth

(*5)

Fabric Banner (*5)

ThinFab.Banner

(*5)

Proong Paper

(*5)



FineArt Photo (*5)

FneArt HW Photo

(*5)

FineArt Txtr (*5)

FineArt Wtrclr (*5)

FineArtBlockP (*5)

Canvas Matte (*5)

JPN Paper Washi

(*5)

Colored Coated

(*5)

CAD Trace Paper

(*5)

CAD Matte Film

(*5)

Fourth Level

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 37

Control Panel

First Level

Paper Details

Second Level Third Level

CAD Clear Film

(*5)

Special # Here, the number is 1-10 (*5)

Chk Remain.Roll

Off *

Fourth Level

On

Roll Length Set (*1,

*2)

### m

### feet

(The paper type is displayed here.) (*5)

Roll DryingTime Off

30 sec.

1 min.

Scan Wait Time

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

3 min.

5 min.

10 min.

30 min.

60 min.

Off

1 sec.

3 sec.

5 sec.

7 sec.

9 sec.

Automatic *

Band Joint

Print Length

From -0.70% to

0.70%

Head Height Automatic *

Highest

High

Standard

Low

Lowest

Skew Check Lv.

Standard *

Loose

38 Printer Parts

Fifth Level

Control Panel

First Level

Job Management

Second Level

Job Queue Ope.

Com. BOX Ope.

Psnl. BOX Ope.

Third Level

VacuumStrngth

Off

Fourth Level

Automatic *

Strongest

Strong

Standard

Weak

Weakest

Width Detection Off

On *

NearEnd RollMrgn 5mm

Cut Speed

20mm

Fast

Standard

Trim Edge First

Cutting Mode

Slow

Automatic

Off

On

Automatic

Eject

Manual

Bordless Margin Automatic

Fixed

CutDustReduct.

Off

On

NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm

20mm

Return Defaults No

Job List

Job List

Print Job List

Job List

Fifth Level

Yes

(Choose a print job.) Delete

Priority

(Choose a print job.) Print

Delete

No

Yes

Print

Printer Parts 39

Control Panel

First Level

Adjust Printer

Interface Setup

Second Level

Auto Head Adj.

Third Level

Print Job List

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

Manual Head Adj

(*10)

No

Auto Band Adj.

Yes

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

No

Yes

No

Yes

Manual Band Adj No

Yes

Adjust Length (*3) No

Calibration

Yes

Auto Adjust

Calibration Log

Use Adj. Value

Return Defaults

No

Yes

Date

Paper Type

Disabled

Enabled *

No

Yes

EOP Timer 10 sec.

30 sec.

1 min.

2 min.

5 min.

10 min. *

30 min.

Fourth Level

Delete

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Off

On *

40 Printer Parts

Fifth Level

First Level

Control Panel

Second Level

TCP/IP

Third Level

60 min.

IP Mode

Protocol (*4)

Fourth Level

Automatic

Manual *

DHCP

IP Setting

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W

Fifth Level

On

Off *

On

Off *

On

Off *

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

NetWare

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

NetWare

Frame Type (*6)

On

Off *

Auto Detect

Ethernet 2

Ethernet 802.2 *

Ethernet 802.3

Ethernet SNAP

Print Service (*6) BinderyPServer

RPrinter

NDSPServer *

NPrinter

On

Off *

Auto Detect On *

Off

Comm.Mode (*7) Half Duplex *

Full Duplex

Ethernet Type (*7) 10 Base-T *

100 Base-TX

Spanning Tree Not Use *

Use

Printer Parts 41

Control Panel

First Level

Maintenance

System Setup

Second Level

Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

Repl. maint cart

Replace P.head

Repl. S. Cleaner

Change Cutter

Move Printer

Third Level

MAC Address

No *

IEEE1394

No *

Yes

No

Yes

Printhead L

Printhead R

No

Yes

No

Yes

L & R Printheads No

Yes

Fourth Level

000085XXXXXX

No

Yes

No

Yes

Level 1 *

Level 2

Level 3

Warning Buzzer Off

On *

Detect Mismatch Pause

Warning

Skip Take-Up Err

(*9)

None *

Off *

On

Keep Media Size Off *

On

Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1

Sht Selection 2

ISO A3+ *

13"x19"(Super B)

ISO B1

28"x40" (ANSI F)

Noz. Check Freq.

Off

Fifth Level

42 Printer Parts

First Level Second Level

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Third Level

1 page

10 pages

Automatic *

5 min. *

10 min.

15 min.

20 min.

30 min.

40 min.

50 min.

60 min.

240 min.

meter * feet/inch

0:London (GMT)

+1:Paris,Rome

+2:Athens,Cairo

+3:Moscow

+4:Eerevan,Baku

+5:Islamabad

+6:Dacca

+7:Bangkok

+8:Hong Kong

+9:Tokyo,Seoul

+10:Canberra

+11NewCaledonia

+12:Wellington

-12:Eniwetok

-11:Midway is.

-10Hawaii(AHST)

-9:Alaska(AKST)

-8:Oregon (PST)

-7:Arizona(MST)

-6:Texas (CST)

-5:NewYork(EST)

Fourth Level

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 43

Control Panel


Date Format

Date & Time

Third Level

-4:Santiago

-3:Buenos Aires

-2:

-1:Cape Verde

yyyy/mm/dd * dd/mm/yyyy mm/dd/yyyy

Date

Fourth Level

yyyy/mm/dd (*8)

Time

Fifth Level hh:mm

Language

Test Print

44 Printer Parts

Contrast Adj.

-4,-3,-2,-1,0*,

+1,+2,+3,+4

Reset PaprSetngs No

Yes

Erase HDD Data Null No

Yes

Random Data 1x No

Yes

Status Print

Random Data 3x No

Yes

No

Control Panel


Media Details

Print Job Log

Menu Map

Nozzle Check

Yes

Third Level

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Fourth Level Fifth Level

Information System Info

Error Log

Job Log

########-####

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start Time

Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm xxx sec.

xxxxxxxxsq.mm

xx.x ml

*1: Available only if a roll is loaded.

*2: Available only if Chk Remain.Roll is On.

*3: Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Print Length.

*4: Not displayed if IP Mode is Manual.

*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.169) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control

Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.See the Media Conguration Tool Guide

(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

*6: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.

*7: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.

*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.

*9: Displayed if the Media Take-up Unit is attached.

*10: Available after you have used Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. once.

Printer Parts 45

Control Panel

*11: Available if: (a) Take-up Reel is Enable, (b) roll paper is loaded, and (c) you have not executed

Auto Feed for the loaded roll.

*12: Not displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.

*13: Follows the setting in Length Unit.

Caution

• Only the following menus are displayed during printing.

• Menu Durng Prtng

Choose this menu to display Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information.

• Job Mgmt Menu

Choose this menu to display Job Management.

Submenus

Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the following order.

■The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

■Information on the loaded paper

■Printer information

For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.63)

46 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.


For details on menu items available during printing, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.60)

First Level

Second

Level

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Seventh

Level

Menu Durng

Prtng

Head

Cleaning

Head

Cleaning A

Head

Cleaning B

Fine Band

Adj.

From -5 to 5

Information System Info

Error Log

Job Log

######## -

####


Document

Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start

Time

Print End

Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink

Consumed

Job Mgmt

Menu

Job Queue

Ope.

HDD

Information

Job List (Choose a print job.)

Priority

Com. BOX

Ope.


Delete

Print

Delete

Print Job List No

Yes

Printer Parts 47

Control Panel

First Level

Second

Level

Psnl. BOX

Ope.

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level

Folder List (Enter a password if one has been set.)


Seventh

Level

Print

Delete

Print Job List No

Yes

48 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.


For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Paper Cutting This command is available only if a roll is loaded.

Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. However, if paper cannot be advanced to the cut position, it will not be cut. In this case, manually advance the roll before cutting it. (→P.190)

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning

Auto Feed

Take-up Reel

Media Menu

Paper Details

Job Management

When replacing the Ink Tank , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

(→P.677)

Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.693)

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A.

This command is available only if Take-up Reel is set to Enable. Choose Yes to advance roll paper automatically on the Rewind Spool , up to the fastening position.

Choose Enable to use the Media Take-up Unit .

Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.50)

Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing options. (→P.51)

Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.53)

Adjust Printer

Interface Setup

Maintenance

System Setup

Test Print

Information

Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern. (→P.54)

Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.55)

Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move the printer. (→P.56)

Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.

(→P.57)

Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.

Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details.

Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general, not specic in nature.)

Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.

Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.

Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs. (→P.59)

Printer Parts 49

Control Panel

Media Menu

Setting Item

Cut Sheet Type (*1) Choose the type of sheets.

(→P.215)

Description, Instructions

Roll Media Type (*1) Choose the type of roll.

(→P.188)

Chk Remain.Roll

Roll Length Set

Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.

Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.

If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.



Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide

(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

50 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Paper Details

Setting Item

(The paper type is displayed here.)(*1)

Roll DryingTime

Scan Wait Time

Feed Priority

Adjust Length


Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.

Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.

Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select

Automatic. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print

Length may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.

Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.

Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.

Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).

For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower adjustment value.

Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.653) Head Height

Skew Check Lv.

VacuumStrngth

If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is

Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.

(→P.660)

Width Detection When this setting is set to Off , the printer prints without detecting the paper width. Specify Off when printing at a width different from the paper width.

NearEnd RollMrgn Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 5mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.

Cut Speed

Trim Edge First

Cutting Mode

Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing

Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.

If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.

Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.

Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after printing. If you choose Manual, the paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.

Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.

Printer Parts 51

Control Panel

Setting Item

(The paper type is displayed here.)(*1)

Bordless Margin


Adjust the margin during borderless printing.

Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not detected automatically, and the document is printed without borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.

CutDustReduct.

Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting lm and similar media by printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper. (→P.197)

NearEnd Sht Mrgn Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.

Return Defaults Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.



Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.

52 Printer Parts

Job Management

Job Queue Ope. Job List

Setting Item

(Choose a print job)

Delete

Priority

Com. BOX Ope.

Job List (Choose a print job)

Print

Delete

Print Job List

Psnl. BOX Ope.

Folder List (Enter a password if one has been set.)

Job List

Print Job List

Print

Delete

Control Panel

Description,

Instructions

Delete the current job or queued jobs.

(→P.115)

Print the job

rst after the current print job is nished.

(→P.115)

Print jobs in the

Common Box.

Delete jobs in the Common

Box.

Print a list of jobs in the Common

Box.

Print jobs in

Personal Boxes.

Delete jobs in

Personal Boxes.

Print a list of jobs in Personal

Boxes.

Printer Parts 53

Control Panel

Adjust Printer

Adjust Length

Calibration

Setting Item

Auto Head Adj.

Manual Head Adj

Auto Band Adj.

Manual Band Adj

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Adjust

Calibration Log

Use Adj. Value

Return Defaults


Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. (→P.649)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle and printing direction. (→P.649)

Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the

Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead .

(→P.649)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern. (→P.651)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

(→P.654)

Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon paper, or paper for purposes other than checking output.

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and requires more ink than

Standard Adj. (→P.654)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount based on the paper type.

(→P.657)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the amount of adjustment. (→P.661)

Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value after a test pattern for color calibration is printed. The latest color calibration adjustment value is applied for all paper.

The date of color calibration and the paper type is indicated on the Display Screen .

Choose Disabled and press the OK button to print without applying the color calibration adjustment value. The printer driver settings are given priority.

Select Enabled and press the OK button to apply the color calibration adjustment value in printing. However, the printer driver settings will be given priority.

Clears the color calibration adjustment value and log.

54 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Interface Setup

Setting Item

EOP Timer

TCP/IP

NetWare

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

IP Mode

Protocol

IP Setting

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

MAC Address

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W


Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

Choose whether the printer IP address is congured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.

Specify the protocol used to congure the IP address automatically.

Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default gateway.

Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Specify the frame type to use.

Choose the print service.

Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Choose On for automatic conguration of the LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.

Choose the LAN communication method.

Choose the LAN transfer rate.

Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.

Displays the MAC address.

Choose the expansion interface.

Execute? is displayed if you press the ▼ button.

Choose OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Printer Parts 55

Control Panel

Maintenance

Setting Item

Repl. maint cart

Replace P.head

Repl. S. Cleaner

Change Cutter

Move Printer


When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.705)

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining

Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.

When replacing the Printhead , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.694)

When replacing the Shaft Cleaner , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.705)

When replacing the Cutter Unit , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.702)

You can also reset the cut counter after the Cutter Unit is replaced.

When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of transfer and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.721)

56 Printer Parts

Control Panel

System Setup

Warning

Setting Item

Keep Media Size

Buzzer

Detect Mismatch

Skip Take-Up Err


Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.

Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning message) during printing if the paper type specied in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose None to continue to print without notication. Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by pressing the Online button.

Choose On to continue with printing even if an error occurs with the Media Take-up Unit . Choose Off to have the printer pause before printing if a rewinding error occurs.

Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the margin from being printed.

Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.

Paper Size Basis

Noz. Check Freq.

Sleep Timer

Sht Selection 1

Sht Selection 2

If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+ or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.

If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO B1 or 28"x40" (ANSI F) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.

Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.

Choose 1 page to check once per printed page. Choose

10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose

Automatic to have the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.

Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.

Printer Parts 57

Control Panel

Length Unit

Setting Item

Time Zone

Date Format

Date & Time

Language

Contrast Adj.

Reset PaprSetngs

Date

Time

Erase HDD Data


Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed.

You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.

Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean

Time.

Specify the date format.

Set the current date.

Set the current time.

Specify the language used on the Display Screen .

Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.

Restores settings that you have changed with Media

Conguration Tool to the factory default values. If paper added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper.

Erase all data on the hard disk.

58 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

HDD Information

Setting Item

Version Firm

Boot

MIT s/n

MAC

IP

########-####


Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status


Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed

HDDSpace


Displays the printer rmware version.

Displays the version of the boot

ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address of the printer.

Displays the printer’s IP address.

Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).

Displays the document name in the last print job.

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

Displays the results of the print job processed.

Displays the time when the print job was started.

Displays the time when the print job was nished.

Displays the time required to print the job.

Displays the paper size in the print job.

Displays the paper type in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Displays the ink consumption.

Displays the space available on the printer’s hard disk.

Printer Parts 59

Control Panel

Main Menu Settings (During Printing)

Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.


For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Menu Durng

Prtng

Head Cleaning Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.693)

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A.

Fine Band Adj.

Information

Fine-tune the feed amount manually.

Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs.

(→P.61)

Job Mgmt Menu Perform operations related to print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.

(→P.62)

60 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

HDD Information

Setting Item

Version

Ext I/F s/n

MAC

HDDSpace

########-####

HDDSpace

Firm

Boot

MIT


Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status


Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed


Displays the version of the printer and

rmware.

Displays the version of the boot ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the name of interfaces compatible with the expansion slot.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address.


Displays the most recent error messages

(up to two).

Displays the document name in the last print job.

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

Displays the results of the print job processed.

Displays the time when the print job was started.

Displays the time when the print job was

nished.

Displays the time required to print the job.

Displays the paper size in the print job.

Displays the paper type in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Displays the ink consumption.


Printer Parts 61

Control Panel

Job Mgmt Menu

Job Queue

Ope.

Job List

Setting Item

(Choose a print job.)

Priority

Delete

Com. BOX Ope.


Print

Delete

Print Job List

Psnl. BOX Ope. Folder List (Enter a password if one has been set.)

Job List

Print Job List

Print

Delete

Description,

Instructions

Print the job rst after the current print job is

nished printing.

(→P.115)

Delete the current job or queued jobs.

(→P.115)

Print jobs in the

Common Box.

Delete jobs in the Common

Box.

Print a list of jobs in the Common

Box.

Print jobs in

Personal Boxes.

Delete jobs in

Personal Boxes.

Print a list of jobs in Personal

Boxes.

62 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Submenu Display

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information.

Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.

Note

• Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

• After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ve seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.

The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the

Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

Remaining ink is indicated as follows.

Information of the loaded paper

Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.

Printer information

Displays the rmware version, serial number, IP address, and hard disk capacity.

Printer Parts 63

Control Panel

Status Print

You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.

With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the utilization level of consumables.

Printing Status Print Reports

1.

Load paper.

If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized. You will need at least four sheets.

2.

Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

Checking the information in the Status Print report

The following information is included in the Status Print report.

Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print Printer model

Firm

Boot

MIT(DBF)

Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

MIT Database Format Version

MIT(DB)

S/N

MIT Database Version

Printer serial number

MC Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)

PC, C, PM, Y, GY, Bk, MBk, and M Ink levels.

The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.

64 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Takeup-Reel

Media Menu

Roll Media Type

Check Remain. Roll

Cut Sheet Type

Adjust Printer

Head Adjust

Auto Print

A1-F2

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Calibration

Execution Log

Date:

Media:

Use Adj. Value:

Status of the Media Take-up Unit

Information on the loaded paper.

Current printer settings.

Printhead adjustment value.

Settings related to paper feeding.

The color calibration setting value.

The calibration log.

Indicates the date calibration was performed and the type of paper used.

This value indicates whether the results of color calibration are used or not.

Printer Parts 65

Control Panel

Interface Setup

EOP Timer

TCP/IP

Current network settings.

Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and canceling printing.

Settings related to TCP/IP .

IP Mode

Protocol

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Setting IP Setting values.

NetWare

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

MAC Address

IP Address

Subnet

Mask

Default

G/W

NetWare settings.

Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.

Ethernet Driver settings.

66 Printer Parts

System Setup

Warning Current warning and error settings.

Buzzer

Detect Mismatch

Skip Take-Up Err

Keep Media Size

Sheet Selection 1

Sheet Selection 2

Current paper-related settings.

Nozzle-check settings.

General printer settings.

Nozzle Check

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Date Format

Language

Contrast Adj.

Information

RAM

Error Log

HDD Capacity

System information and an error log.

Control Panel

Printer Parts 67

Control Panel

Network (RemoteUI)

TCP/IP

Frame Type

Use BOOTP

Use DHCP

Use RARP

Enable DNS Dynamic

Update

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address*

Subnet Mask*

Gateway Address*

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

RAW Printing

Raw Port Number

Raw Mode Bi-direction

FTP Printing

Primary DNS Server

Address*

Secondary DNS Server

Address*

DNS Host Name*

DNS Domain Name*

SMTP Server Address*

Multicast DNS Service

Name

Current network settings used by RemoteUI.

*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.

68 Printer Parts

Control Panel

NetWare Current NetWare settings.

Frame Type

IPX External Network

Number*

Node Number*

Print Service

*: Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.

Bindery PServer Values set when NetWare > Print Service > Bindery PServer is selected.

File Server

Name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

Polling Interval

RPrinter Values set when NetWare > Print Service > RPrinter is selected.

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*

NDS PServer

Tree Name*

Context name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NDS PServer is selected.

NPrinter Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NPrinter is selected.

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*


Printer Parts 69

Control Panel

AppleTalk

Phase Type

Name*

Network Number*

Zone*

Current AppleTalk settings.


HEAD LOT NUMBER Printhead lot number.

LOT R,L

Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.

PARTS STATUS

COUNTER A-V

COUNTER

CUTTER

MEDIA

MEDIA1-7

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

AFTER INSTALLATION

Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how much they have been used).

70 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Hard Disk

Printer Hard Disk Operations

Printer hard disk operations are available through the Control Panel, printer driver, imagePROGRAF Print

Plug-in, RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.

Saving print jobs

Operation

Print Yes

Printer Driver or imagePROGRAF

Print Plug-in

No imagePROGRAF

Status Monitor or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor

Print (auto delete)

Yes No

RemoteUI

No

No

Control

Panel

No

No

Save in mail box Yes

Save data before printing(*1)

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

Operations with saved jobs

Job queue management

Print saved jobs

Delete saved jobs

Display job queue

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Delete

Priority

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mail box management

Move saved jobs No

Modify saved jobs

No

Modify mail boxes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Print a list of saved jobs

No

Other operations

Display a list of saved jobs

No

Display free hard disk space

No

No Initialize hard disk

Recover after errors

Display error messages

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1: This option is available with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print jobs are saved and then printed.

Printer Parts 71

Hard Disk

Saved Print Jobs

Saving print jobs refers to the process of sending print jobs from a computer and storing them on the printer’s hard disk. By saving print jobs, you can print them repeatedly as needed without sending them from a computer again.

Saving print jobs enables you to do the following things.

• Save the time spent using a computer

When you send a print job to the printer, you can either print it and save it on the printer at the same time or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required quantity later without the need to use a computer again.

• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur

If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing the error without resending the print job from a computer.

• Streamline printing work

Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night, for example.

Format of saved print jobs

When saving print jobs on the printer’s hard disk, choose the format in the printer driver or on the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in screen. Choose from three formats for saving print jobs: Print, Print (auto

delete), and Save in mail box. You can also choose Save data before printing, as desired.

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)

• Print (auto delete)

Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.

• Save in mail box

Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.

• Save data before printing

This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.

72 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Storage destination

The storage area on the printer’s hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage area. Print jobs in the “job queue” or “Common Box” are saved in the temporary storage area. Jobs in

“Personal Boxes” are saved in the permanent storage area.

• Job queue

Current print jobs are temporarily saved in the job queue, a storage space where jobs are saved in the order they will be printed.(*1)

Up to ten jobs can be stored in the queue. Subsequent jobs are treated as "standby" jobs, to be processed when possible.

*1: Jobs that are being saved, received, printed, or deleted, or jobs that have been interrupted or are waiting to print

• Common Box

If you have specied Print as the format, jobs sent from the computer are saved in the Common Box.

There is one Common Box, with the Common Box number “00”. A password cannot be set for the

Common Box.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.

• If there are more than 101 jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined

• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto

delete) are received

• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format

Save in mail box are received

• Personal Boxes

You can store jobs in Personal Boxes in either of the following ways.

• By moving a job stored in the Common Box into a Personal Box

• By selecting Save in mail box as the format

There are nine Personal Boxes, with Personal Boxes numbered “01” to “09”. You can specify a name and password for each Personal Box.

Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all Personal Boxes combined.

Printer Parts 73

Hard Disk

Saving Print Jobs

You can use the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in to save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.

Using the printer driver (Windows)

1.

Access the Page Setup sheet.

2.

Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.

74 Printer Parts

3.

In Output Method, choose the format for saved print jobs.

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)





If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination Personal Box in the Mail box list.

Hard Disk

Note

• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display Personal Box names in the Mail box list, as acquired from the printer.



4.

In Name of data to be saved, specify how to name saved print jobs.

• To use the le name, choose Use le name.

• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.

5.

Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.

Printer Parts 75

Hard Disk

Using the printer driver (Mac OS X)

1.

Access the Additional Settings pane.

2.

In Send job to, choose the format for saved print jobs.

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.



76 Printer Parts

Hard Disk



The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box. Here, specify the name and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.

1.

In Document title, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.

2.

Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.

3.

Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.

Note



Printer Parts 77

Hard Disk

Using the printer driver (Mac OS 9)

1.

Access the Additional Settings pane.

2.

In Send job to, choose the format for saved print jobs.

• Print

Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.



78 Printer Parts

Hard Disk



The Destination dialog box is displayed if you have selected Save in mail box. Here, specify the name and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.

1.

In Document, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.

2.

Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.

3.

Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.

Note



Using imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in

For details, refer to the topic for the Set Conguration button on the Main sheet in the Print Plug-In Guide.

There is a Windows and Macintosh version of the Print Plug-In Guide. You can access them from the top page of this user manual.

Printer Parts 79

Hard Disk

Checking a List of Saved Jobs

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs

You can display saved print jobs in the Common Box and each Personal Box.

You can view a list of stored print jobs as follows.

• Using the Control Panel

• Using RemoteUI

• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

(Using the Control Panel )

1.


2.

Display a list of saved print jobs.

• To display jobs saved in the Common Box

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.

• To display jobs saved in Personal Boxes

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.

4.

Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.

Note

• You can check a list of print jobs in the queue by choosing Job Management → Job Queue Ope.

80 Printer Parts

(Using RemoteUI )

Choose a mail box on the Stored Job page to display a list of jobs saved in that mail box.

Hard Disk

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set.

Printer Parts 81

Hard Disk

Jobs saved in the mail box are listed.

For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.

82 Printer Parts

Note


Jobs saved in that mail box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.

Hard Disk

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )

On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.

Printer Parts 83

Hard Disk

Note


For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.

Printing a List of Saved Jobs

You can print a list of saved print jobs in the Common Box and each Personal Box.

You can also print a print job list by using the Control Panel.

1.


2.

Print a list of saved print jobs.

• To print a list of jobs saved in the Common Box

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.

4.


• To print a list of jobs saved in Personal Boxes

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.

6.


84 Printer Parts

Printing Saved Jobs

You can print jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk as follows.


• Using RemoteUI



Using the Control Panel

1.


2.

Print the saved job.

• Printing jobs in the Common Box

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.

6.

Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.

7.

Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.

• Printing jobs in Personal Boxes

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.

8.

Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.

9.


Hard Disk

Printer Parts 85

Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

1.

On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.

Note


86 Printer Parts

2.

Select the print job in the list and click Print.

3.

On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.

Hard Disk


Printer Parts 87

Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

1.


Note


88 Printer Parts

2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Print.

Hard Disk

3.

In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.


Printer Parts 89

Hard Disk

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

1.


Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Resume Printing to display the Resume Printing dialog box.

3.



90 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Managing Saved Jobs

Moving saved jobs

Print jobs that you have saved in the Print format are saved in the Common Box, number “00”. However, jobs in this mail box will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.

• If there are more than 101 saved jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined

• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto delete) are received

• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format

Save in mail box are received

You can move jobs to Personal Boxes “01” to “09” to prevent them from being deleted. (Up to 100 jobs can be stored here.)

You can also move saved jobs from one Personal Box to another.

You can move stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



Note

• Jobs saved in Personal Boxes cannot be moved to the Common Box.

(Using RemoteUI )

1.


Printer Parts 91

Hard Disk

Note


2.

Select the print job in the list and click Move.

92 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

3.

On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination Personal Box in the Destination mail box list and click OK.



1.


Printer Parts 93

Hard Disk

Note


2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Move.

3.

In the Move dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK.


94 Printer Parts


1.


Hard Disk

Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Move.

Printer Parts 95

Hard Disk

3.

In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK.


96 Printer Parts

Displaying details of saved jobs

You can view details of stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI

• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Using RemoteUI )

1.


Hard Disk

Note


Printer Parts 97

Hard Disk

2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Details.

The Details of the saved document page is displayed.


98 Printer Parts


1.


Hard Disk

Note


Printer Parts 99

Hard Disk

2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.

The Properties dialog box is displayed.


100 Printer Parts


1.

On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.

Hard Disk

Note



Printer Parts 101

Hard Disk

Renaming saved jobs

You can rename stored print jobs as follows.

• Using RemoteUI

• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Using RemoteUI )

1.


Note


102 Printer Parts

2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Details.

Hard Disk

3.

On the Details of the saved document page, click Change Document.

Printer Parts 103

Hard Disk

4.

On the Rename Saved Document page, enter the new job name in Document Name and click OK.


104 Printer Parts


1.


Hard Disk

Note


Printer Parts 105

Hard Disk

2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.

3.

In the Properties dialog box, enter the job name and click OK.


106 Printer Parts


1.


Hard Disk

Note


Printer Parts 107

Hard Disk

2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Settings.

3.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.

Documents cannot be renamed unless a password has been set. In this case, specify a password. After renaming, you can cancel the password as needed.


108 Printer Parts

Deleting Saved Jobs

You can delete saved jobs in the Common Box or Personal Boxes.

You can delete stored print jobs as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Delete the saved job.

• To delete saved jobs in the Common Box

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.

6.

Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.

• To delete saved jobs in Personal Boxes

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.

8.

Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.

Hard Disk

Printer Parts 109

Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

1.


Note


110 Printer Parts

2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.

Hard Disk


Printer Parts 111

Hard Disk


1.


Note


112 Printer Parts

2.

In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Delete.

Hard Disk


Printer Parts 113

Hard Disk


1.


Note


2.

Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.


114 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Modifying the Current Job (Deleting or Preempting Other

Jobs)

You can delete jobs that are currently being printed.

You can also select queued jobs and give them rst priority, to print them before other jobs.

Note

• You cannot preempt queued jobs with jobs that are currently being saved, printed, or deleted.

You can modify current print jobs as follows.


• Using RemoteUI



Printer Parts 115

Hard Disk


1.


2.

Modify the job currently being printed.

• Deleting jobs currently being printed

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.

• Changing the order of printing

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print rst, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Priority, and then press the OK button.

Using RemoteUI

On the Print Job page, select the job to modify and how to modify it. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.

116 Printer Parts


On the Job sheet, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.

• Preempting other jobs

• Pausing printing

• Resuming printing

• Canceling print jobs

Hard Disk


Printer Parts 117

Hard Disk


On the Driver pane, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.

• Preempting other jobs

• Pausing printing

• Resuming printing

• Canceling print jobs


118 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Modifying Personal Boxes

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes

By factory default, no passwords are set for Personal Boxes. For greater security, you can set passwords for each Personal Box. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the Personal Box settings, as well as to display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the Personal Box.

Note

• A password cannot be set for the Common Box.

• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001-9999.

• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access Personal Boxes in Administrator

Mode in RemoteUI.

You can set a password for a Personal Box as follows.

• Using RemoteUI



(Using RemoteUI )

1.

On the Stored Job page, select the Personal Box for a password.

2.

Click Edit.

Printer Parts 119

Hard Disk

3.

In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK.

• Set Password: Select the check box.

• Password: Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)

• Conrm: Re-enter the password.


120 Printer Parts


1.

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed Personal Box for a password and click Open.

Hard Disk

Note

• Enter a password if one has been set for the Personal Box.

Printer Parts 121

Hard Disk

2.

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.

3.

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.

• Set Password: Select this check box.


• Conrmation Number: Re-enter the password.


122 Printer Parts

Hard Disk


1.

On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job and click Settings.

2.

In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.

• Set Password: Select this check box.


• Conrmation Number: Re-enter the password.


Printer Parts 123

Hard Disk

Naming Personal Boxes

By factory default, Personal Boxes are unnamed. You can name them for easier management.

You can assign a name to a Personal Box as follows.

• RemoteUI

• imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

• imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Using RemoteUI )

1.

On the Stored Job page, select the Personal Box to identify.

Note


124 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

2.

Click Edit.

3.

In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, enter the Personal Box name in Inbox Name and click OK.


Printer Parts 125

Hard Disk


1.

On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed Personal Box to identify and click Open.

Note


126 Printer Parts

2.

In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.

3.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the Personal Box name and click OK.


Hard Disk

Printer Parts 127

Hard Disk


1.

On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job and click Settings.

2.

In the Settings dialog box, enter the Personal Box name and click OK.


128 Printer Parts

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space

You can check the space available on the printer’s hard disk as follows.


• Using RemoteUI




1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information, and then press the ► button.

Note

• You can also check the free hard disk space by pressing the Information button three times.

Hard Disk

Using RemoteUI

To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.


Printer Parts 129

Hard Disk


The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.

■Hard Disk Sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor


130 Printer Parts


The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.

■Hard Disk Pane in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor


Hard Disk

Printer Parts 131

Hard Disk

Erasing all data on the printer’s hard disk

You can erase all data on the printer’s hard disk from the Control Panel.

Note

• You cannot erase all data on the hard disk during print jobs.

• Conversely, print jobs cannot be processed during erasure of all hard disk data.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of deletion, and then press the ► button.

5.


132 Printer Parts

Optional accessories

Optional accessories

Roll Holder Set

A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper. If you want to prepare a few rolls with paper of various types and widths for different purposes, it is convenient to have several sets ready. Sets are available for 2- and 3-inch paper cores. (2-inch versions match the set included with the printer.)

• Roll Holder Set RH2-42 (for 2-inch paper cores)


Media Take-up Unit

This unit automatically winds up printed documents.

• Media Take-up Unit TU-06

Note

• For instructions on installing the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Media Take-up Unit Setup Guide.

• For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Paper

Reference Guide.

• For Media Take-up Unit instructions, see “Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)”. (→P.230)

Printer Parts 133

Optional accessories

IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board

An optional interface board to add an IEEE 1394 (also called "FireWire") port.

• IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-05

Note that EB-04 is incompatible.

For instructions on installing the IEEE 1394 expansion board, refer to the documentation provided with the

IEEE 1394 expansion board.

134 Printer Parts

Printer Specications

Printer Specications

Specications

Important

• This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.

• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.

Printer

Power supply

Power consumption During operation

Sleep mode

Operating noise

Off

During operation

Operating environment

Standby

Temperature

Humidity

Dimensions (W × D × H) Printer and Stand

(including Roll Holder and Output Stacker )

Weight Printer and Stand (not including the Printhead and Ink Tank )

Space for installation (W

× D × H)

Printer only

Applicable standards

100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

190 W max.

100-120 V: 5 W max.

(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

220-240 V: 6 W max.

(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

1 W max. (*1)

Approx. 50 dB (A) max. (6.6 bels or less)

Approx. 35 dB (A) max.

15-30°C (59-86°F)

10-80%, non-condensing

1,893 × 975× 1,144 mm (74.5 × 38.4 × 45.0 in)

Approx. 140 kg (313.1 lb)

2,293 × 1,675 × 1,500 mm (90.3 × 65.9 × 59.1 in)

International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting

Green Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, IT Eco Declaration,

WEEE, U.S. presidential directives, J-MOSS (Green

Mark)

*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

Printer Parts 135


Printing performance

Print method

Maximum resolution

Printhead

Number of nozzles

*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.

Bubblejet

2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically

PF-03 ×2

2,560 per color

Interface

Expansion Board Slots

USB 2.0(*1)

Ethernet(*2)

IEEE 1394

Format

Mode

Connector

Format

Specication

Protocols

Format

Specication

1

Internal port

Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer

Series B (4-pin)

Internal port

IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/Auto-Negotiation,

IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex

IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, TCP/IP, AppleTalk

Optional board (compatible with the expansion slot)

IEEE 1394-1995, conforms to P1394a Specication ver. 2.0, half duplex, Data/Strb differential serial

100/200/400 Mbps

Conforms to IEEE 1394-1995 (6-pin), no power supply

Transfer speed

Connector

*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:

• Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible

• Operating system: Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.3 or later

• USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)

• USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable

136 Printer Parts


Ink

Ink Tank

Capacity

MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black Ink , or black ink for matte paper)

BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink )

C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink )

M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink )

Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink )

PC Ink Tank (photo cyan ink)

PM Ink Tank (photo magenta ink)

GY Ink Tank (gray ink)

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

PFI-301MBK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701MBK (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301BK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701BK (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301C (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701C (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301M (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701M (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301Y (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701Y (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301PC (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701PC (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301PM (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701PM (700 ml [23.7  oz])

PFI-301GY (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or

PFI-701GY (700 ml [23.7  oz])

330 or 700 ml (11.2 or 23.7  oz) per color (*1)

*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 330 ml (11.2  oz) each.

Printer Parts 137


Paper (*1)

Paper width

Length of one page

Thickness

Media Size

Print area

Rolls

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

Roll width

Sheets

Normal size

Borderless printing

(*3)

Supported width for borderless printing

254-1,118 mm (10-44 in)

203-1,118 mm (8-44 in)

203 (*2)-18,000 mm (8-708.7 in)

203-1,600 mm (8-63 in)

0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)

0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)

44-in. Roll (1117.6mm), 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1 Roll

(1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll (914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm),

30-in. Roll (762.0mm), JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm), 24-in. Roll

(609.6mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm),

17-in. Roll (431.8mm), ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm), 16-in. Roll

(406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm),

10-in. Roll (254.0mm)

ISO A0 , ISO A1 , ISO A2 , ISO A2+ , ISO A3 , ISO A3+ , ISO A4

, ISO B0 , ISO B1 , ISO B2 , ISO B3 , ISO B4 , JIS B0 , JIS B1 ,

JIS B2 , JIS B3 , JIS B4 , 34"x44" (ANSI E) , 28"x40" (ANSI F) ,

22"x34"(ANSI D) , 17"x22"(ANSI C) , 13"x19" (Super B) , 11"x17"

(Ledger) , Legal (8.5"x14") , Letter (8.5"x11") , 36"x48" (ARCH E)

, 30"x42" (ARCH E1) , 26"x38" (ARCH E2) , 27"x39" (ARCH E3)

, 24"x36" (ARCH D) , 18"x24" (ARCH C) , 12"x18" (ARCH B) ,

9"x12" (ARCH A) , DIN C0 , DIN C1 , DIN C2 , DIN C3 , DIN C4 ,

20"x24" , 18"x22" , 14"x17" , 12"x16" , 10"x12" , 10"x15" , 8"x10"

, US Photo 16"x20" , Poster 20"x30" , Poster 30"x40" , Poster

42"x60" , Poster 44"x62" , 13"x22" , Poster 300x900mm

Printable area

• Rolls

5 mm (0.20 in) from each side

• Sheets

5 mm (0.20 in) from the top, 23 mm (0.91 in) from the bottom, and

5 mm (0.20 in) from the left and right sides

For information on the recommended print area, see “Print Area”.

(→P.141)

Printable area (rolls)

0 mm from the top, 0 from the bottom, and 0 mm from the left and right sides

42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll

(914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm), 24-in. Roll (609.6mm),

ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm), 16-in. Roll

(406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)


(→P.169)

*2: When supplying paper, use a roll approximately 1,000 mm (1,093.6 yd) or longer.

*3: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.

138 Printer Parts

Hard Disk

Capacity on the hard disk to store image data

Print job storage capacity

48 GB

• Common mail box: 100 jobs

• Personal boxes: 100 jobs


Printer Parts 139


Basic Environmental Performance

Printer

Power consumption Sleep mode

Resource efciency

Product safety

Off

Weight

Dimensions (W × D × H)

Recycling

Toxic substances

Operating noise

100-120 V: 5 W max.

(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394

(FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

220-240 V: 6 W max.

(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394

(FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

1 W max.

Printer and Stand : Approx. 140 kg (308.6 lb)

Printer and Stand : 1,893 × 975 ×

1,144 mm (74.5 × 38.4 × 45.0 in)

Recyclable plastic used for printer body

Structural components: No prohibited brominated ame retardants used (PBB, PBDE)

Body plastic: No heavy metals

(Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd) or halogenated

ame retardants used

During operation: Approx. 50 dB

(A) max. (6.6 bels or less)

Standby: Approx. 35 dB (A) max.

Packaging materials

Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd) None (none in packaging)

140 Printer Parts


Print Area

A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.

Note

• Printable area: The area that can be printed.

• There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.

• Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

• To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin. (→P.346)

Margins of Printable Area

Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides

Margins of Recommended Print Area

Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides

Sheets 5 mm (0.20 in)

23 mm (0.91

in)

5 mm (0.20 in)

20 mm (0.79

in)

23 mm (0.91

in)

5 mm (0.20 in)

Rolls

0/5 mm

(0/0.20 in)

0/5 mm

(0/0.20 in)

0/5 mm

(0/0.20 in)

20 mm (0.79

in)

5 mm (0.20 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)

Sheets

• Printable Area:

A margin of 5 mm (0.20 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

• Recommended print area:


Rolls

• Printable Area:

A margin of 5 mm (0.20 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.169)

• Recommended print area:


Printer Parts 141

Printing procedure

Basic Printing Workow

Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Rolls

These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.

Follow the steps below to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.

Note

• If you are not using the optional Media Take-up Unit when printing long documents such as banners, spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor. Use the Output Stacker to prevent the oor from soiling printed documents after they are printed. (→P.221)

• If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (→P.193)

1.

Turn the printer on. (→P.19)

2.

Select a roll as the paper source. (→P.178)

142 Basic Printing Workow

3.

Set a roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.179)

4.

Load the roll in the printer. (→P.182)

Printing procedure

5.

Select the paper type. (→P.188)

Basic Printing Workow 143

Printing procedure

6.

Select the paper length. (→P.189)

7.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.156)

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.158)

• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) (→P.160)

Important

• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message is displayed and the printing quality may be affected, or printing may not be possible.

• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.766)

• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.765)

• Paper Mismatch (→P.765)


Printing procedure

8.

Start printing.

• Printing from Windows (→P.151)

• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.152)

• Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.154)

Note

• You can skip steps 5 and 6 if a barcode has been printed on the roll paper and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll. The paper type and amount of paper left are automatically detected. The barcode will automatically be cut off after it has been read.

• You can skip step 6 if you have deactivated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper.

• If you have deactivated width detection, you will need to enter the roll width after choosing the paper type in step 5. (→P.49)

• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.169)

• When printing on rolls after printing on sheets, if the lit paper selection lamp does not switch from the

Cut Sheet lamp to the Roll Media lamp, press the Feeder Selection button.

Important

• After changing rolls, clean the Platen. (→P.717)


Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Sheets

These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.

Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.

1.


2.

Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

• Roll (→P.186)

• Sheet (→P.216)


3.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.




Printing procedure

4.

Send the print job.

• Printing from Windows (→P.151)

• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.152)

• Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.154)


Printing procedure

5.

Load the sheet. (→P.212)

Note

• If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, after you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. Follow these steps.

• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)

Start printing.

Note

• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.150)

• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper

Reference Guide. (→P.169)


Printing procedure

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

The printer supports both rolls and sheets. Take advantage of each type of paper for a wide range of printing applications.

Rolls and sheets

• Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media.

Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

• Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.

Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.

Paper size

• Page Size: The size of the image to be printed, as specied in the application.

• Paper size:

• In the case of sheets, paper size refers to the actual size of the paper loaded in the printer.

• In the case of rolls, paper size is an imagined size set as the printing area for a single page.

Printing options using rolls and sheets

Printing Method

Large-Format Printing

Rolls

Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Ofce applications. Print documents up to 18 m (19.7 yd) long.

Borderless Printing Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.

Free Layout (Windows)

Free Layout (Macintosh)

Banner printing

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

Print pages of a multi-page document consecutively without blank space between pages.


Printing procedure

Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing

After loading sheets, if you select a type of paper in the printer menu with width detection deactivated, you will need to feed the paper a different way than usual. Specically, you must manually advance the paper to the position of printing.

In this case, advance the paper as far into the paper feed slot as possible because it will be printed starting at that position.

Manually advance paper as follows.

1.

When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.

If you select Width Detection ON, change the Media Detailed Settings information for that paper and use the regular feeding method.

2.

Keeping the right edge of the sheet aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a) on the right side of the printer, load the sheet so that the near edge is aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the platen.

3.

Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.

4.

After a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.


Printing procedure

Printing from Windows

Print from the application software menu.

Important

• The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:

• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

• Windows Vista

• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

1.

In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.

Note

• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the application software. In most cases, the dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Note

• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box displayed after clicking Printer.

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:

• From the application software

(→P.538)

• From the operating system menu

(→P.206)


Printing procedure

Printing from Mac OS X

Print from the application menu after registering the printer.

Important


Registering the printer

Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).

For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.

(→P.638)

Important

• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.

• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.639)

Note

• When registering the printer, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, Canon FireWire(iPF) if connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk, Canon IP(iPF), or Bonjour if connected via a network.

• For Canon IP(iPF) connections, enter the printer’s IP address.


Printing procedure

Printing from the application software

1.


Note

• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3.

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.


Printing procedure

Printing from Mac OS 9

After selecting the printer in Chooser from the Apple menu, print by using menus in the source application.

Important


Selecting the printer

Before printing, you must conrm that the printer is selected in Chooser.

For instructions on selecting the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”. (→P.638)

Important

• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed in Chooser if it is off or disconnected.

• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.639)

Note

• In Chooser, choose GARO Printer Driver.

• In Destination, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, FireWire if connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk, IP Print, or IP Print (Auto) if connected via network.

• If the printer is connected via AppleTalk under AppleTalk, click Active in the lower-right corner of the Chooser window.

• If the printer is connected via IP Print, click Registering IP Address under the Destination list to register the printer’s IP address, and then click IP Print.


Printing procedure

Printing from the application software

1.


Note

• This dialog box includes basic printing options for the range of pages, number of copies, and so on. You can also specify enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, and a variety of other print settings.

2.

Make sure the printer is selected in the Printer list.

3.



Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important

• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.

Choose Print in the application menu.

2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.538)

3.

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5.

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.


Printing procedure

6.

In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.

7.

In the L Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.

8.

If you have selected Roll Paper in L Media Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll

Paper Width.

Note

• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.

For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.506)


Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)


1.

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.

Select the printer in the B Format for list.

3.

Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4.

Click F OK to close the dialog box.

5.


6.

Access the Main pane.


7.


8.

Access the Page Setup pane.

Printing procedure

9.

In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.

10.

If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Media Source, make sure the size as selected in

Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width.

Note

• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer

Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note


For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.557)


Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9)


1.

Select the printer in Chooser.

2.


3.

Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.

4.

Click I OK to close the dialog box.

5.


6.

Make sure the Main pane is displayed.


7.

In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

8.

Access the Finishing pane.

Printing procedure

9.

In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.

10.

If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width.

Note



Note


For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.583)


Canceling print jobs

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.

Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or more during printing.

• If you press the Stop button before printing starts

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings the printer online.

When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected, the printer goes ofine.

• If you press the Stop button during printing

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.

• If you press the Stop button when printing is paused

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.



Canceling Print Jobs from Windows

You can cancel print jobs in the printer window.

1.

Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.

Note

• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or

Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.

2.

Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.

Note

• The print job is displayed on the printer screen during the transmission of print data from the computer. When the transmission is nished, the job is not displayed even during printing.

To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.

1.

If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data

lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.

Do the following if no print jobs are shown in the printer window (because they have already been sent to the printer).

1.

Double-click the taskbar icon to access the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

2.

On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.



Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X

You can cancel print jobs in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

1.

Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.

2.

Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.

In this window, you can cancel jobs sent to the printer.

Note

• The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the computer. When the transmission is nished, the job is not displayed even during printing.

3.

Click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.



4.

Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

Note

• The print job is displayed on the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window while the printer receives the print data from the computer. It is not displayed before transmission of print data to the printer, even if the computer has started the process of the data.

5.

Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.

Important

• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.


1.





Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9

How to cancel print jobs varies depending on whether you are printing in the foreground or background.

Canceling background print jobs

1.

Open the Garo Printer Extra folder, which was installed on the hard disk at the same time as the printer driver.

2.

Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

3.

Choose Pause Printing in the File menu to stop print processing.

The job status changes from Sending to Send.

4.

Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.

5.

Choose Resume Printing in the File menu.

Important

• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart the print queue, the next job cannot be printed.


1.





Canceling foreground print jobs

1.

When the progress indicator is displayed, hold down the Command key and press the period

(.) key to cancel print jobs.

2.




Paper

Handling Paper

Paper

Paper

The printer supports the following paper.

Types of paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)

Paper size

Rolls Paper width

Sheets

Outer diameter

Inner diameter of paper core

Printing surface

44-in. Roll (1117.6mm), 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS

B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll (914.4mm), ISO

A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm), 30-in. Roll (762.0mm), JIS

B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm), 24-in. Roll (609.6mm), ISO

A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm),

17-in. Roll (431.8mm), ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm),

16-in. Roll (406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), ISO

A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)

Up to 150 mm (5.9 in)

2 or 3 inches

Top (outside)

ISO A0 , ISO A1 , ISO A2 , ISO A2+ , ISO A3 , ISO

A3+ , ISO A4 , ISO B0 , ISO B1 , ISO B2 , ISO B3

, ISO B4 , JIS B0 , JIS B1 , JIS B2 , JIS B3 , JIS

B4 , ANSI E , ANSI F , ANSI D , ANSI C , ANSI B ,

ANSI B Super , ANSI Letter , ANSI Legal , ARCH E ,

ARCH E1 , ARCH E2 , ARCH E3 , ARCH D , ARCH C

, ARCH B , ARCH A , DIN C0 , DIN C1 , DIN C2 , DIN

C3 , DIN C4 , 20"x24" , 18"x22" , 14"x17" , 12"x16"

, 10"x12" , 10"x15" , 8"x10" , US Photo 16"x20" ,

Poster 20"x30" , Poster 30"x40" , Poster 42"x60" ,

Poster 44"x62" , 13"x22" , Poster 300x900mm

Note

• Paper quality varies among manufacturers. For advice before buying paper, contact the Canon dealer where you purchased the printer.

168 Handling Paper

Types of Paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . This guide identies supported plain paper, coated paper, photo paper (such as glossy photo paper), proong paper,

CAD paper, and other types of paper. The Paper Reference Guide identies types and specications of paper, describes printer driver settings, gives tips on handling paper, and identies paper you can use with the Media Take-up Unit (optional).

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel, and in the printer driver by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website.

Note

• The media types with "†" marked in the product name are those specied as genuine Canon media.

For other media, please contact the respective media manufacturer after reading the instruction manuals supplied with the media.

Paper

Handling Paper 169

Paper

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide

You can access the Paper Reference Guide as follows. Follow the steps for your particular operating system.

• Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

The online support window is displayed.

2.

Select Paper Reference Guide.

The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

170 Handling Paper

• Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.


2.

Select Paper Reference Guide.


Paper

Handling Paper 171

Paper

• Mac OS 9

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Paper Reference Guide icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)


172 Handling Paper

Updating paper information

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media Conguration Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration

Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Follow these steps to access the imagePROGRAF website.

Important

• When you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool, the paper type setting on the

Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software is updated.

• Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

Paper


2.

Select Stay Informed.

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Handling Paper 173

Paper

• Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.


2.

Select Stay Informed.

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Note

• In Windows, you can also access the imagePROGRAF webpage by clicking the start menu, selecting

Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > iPFxxxx

Media Conguration Tool to start the Media Conguration Tool, and clicking Extra Information.

• On a Macintosh computer, you can also access the imagePROGRAF website from the Finder by selecting Applications (in Mac OS X or OS 9) > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool

(here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) ) > MCTxxxx to start the Media Conguration Tool and then clicking Extra Information.

174 Handling Paper

Paper Sizes

Rolls

Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.

• Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6.0 in)

• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches

• Printing side out

Roll width

1,118 mm (44 in)

Roll Paper Width Settings in Printer Driver

60-in. Roll (1524mm)

1,067 mm (42 in)

1,030 mm (41 in)

914 mm (36 in)

841 mm (33 in)

762 mm (30 in)

728 mm (29 in)

610 mm (24 in)

594 mm (23 in)

515 mm (20 in)

432 mm (17 in)

420 mm (16.5 in)

406 mm (16 in)

356 mm (14 in)

297 mm (12 in)

254 mm (10 in)

Custom Media Width

44-in. Roll (1188mm)

JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030mm)

36-in. Roll (914mm)

ISO A0/A1 Roll (841mm)

30-in. Roll (762mm)


24-in. Roll (610mm)



17-in. Roll (432mm)


16-in. Roll (407mm)

14-in. Roll (356mm)


No

Yes

Yes

No

10-in. Roll (254mm)

254 mm (10 in) - 1,118 mm (44 in)

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Borderless Printing (*1)

*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.169)

Paper

Handling Paper 175

Paper

Sheets

Sheets of the following sizes are supported.

Paper size

ISO A0

ISO A1

ISO A2

ISO A2+

ISO A3

ISO A3+

ISO A4

ISO B0

ISO B1

ISO B2

ISO B3

ISO B4

JIS B0

JIS B1

JIS B2

JIS B3

JIS B4

34"x44" (ANSI E)

28"x40" (ANSI F)

22"x34"(ANSI D)

17"x22"(ANSI C)

11"x17" (Ledger)

13"x19" (Super B)

Letter (8.5"x11")

Legal (8.5"x14")

36"x48" (ARCH E)

30"x42" (ARCH E1)

26"x38" (ARCH E2)

27"x39" (ARCH E3)

24"x36" (ARCH D)

18"x24" (ARCH C)

12"x18" (ARCH B)

9"x12" (ARCH A)

DIN C0

176 Handling Paper

Dimensions

841 × 1,189 mm (33 × 47 in)

594 × 841 mm (23 × 33 in)

420 × 594 mm (16.5 × 23 in)

432 × 610 mm (17 × 24 in)

297 × 420 mm (12 × 17 in)

329 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)

210 × 297 mm (8 × 12 in)

1,000 × 1,414 mm (39.5 × 56 in)

707 × 1,000 mm (28 × 39.5 in)

500 × 707 mm (20 × 28 in)

353 × 500 mm (14 × 20 in)

250 × 353 mm (10 × 14 in)

1,030 × 1,456 mm (40.5 × 57 in)

728 × 1,030 mm (29 × 40.5 in)

515 × 728 mm (20 × 29 in)

364 × 515 mm (14 × 20 in)

257 × 364 mm (10 × 14 in)

864 × 1,118 mm (34 × 44 in)

711 × 1,016 mm (28 × 40 in)

559 × 864 mm (22 × 34 in)

432 × 559 mm (17 × 22 in)

279 × 432 mm (11 × 17 in)

330 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)

216 × 279 mm (8.5 × 11 in)

216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 in)

914 × 1,219 mm (36 × 48 in)

762 × 1,062 mm (30 × 42 in)

660 × 965 mm (26 × 38 in)

686 × 991 mm (27 × 39 in)

610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)

457 × 610 mm (18 × 24 in)

305 × 457 mm (12 × 18 in)

229 × 305 mm (9 × 12 in)

917 × 1,296 mm (36 ×51 in)

DIN C1

DIN C2

DIN C3

DIN C4

20"x24"

18"x22"

14"x17"

12"x16"

10"x12"

10"x15"

8"x10"

US Photo 16"x20"

Poster 20"x30"

Paper size

Poster 30"x40"

Poster 42"x60"

Poster 44"x62"

13"x22"

Poster 300x900mm

Custom Media Size

Dimensions

648 × 917 mm (26 ×36 in)

458 × 648 mm (18 × 26 in)

324 × 458 mm (13 × 18 in)

229 × 324 mm (9 × 13 in)

508 × 610 mm (20 × 24 in)

457 × 559 mm (18 × 22 in)

355 × 432 mm (14 × 17 in)

304 × 406 mm (12 × 16 in)

254 × 305 mm (10 × 12 in)

254 × 381 mm (10 × 15 in)

203 × 254 mm (8 × 10 in)

406 × 508 mm (16 × 20 in)

508 × 762 mm (20 × 30 in)

762 × 1,016 mm (30 × 40 in)

1,067 × 1,524 mm (42 × 60 in)

1,118 × 1,575 mm (44 × 62 in)

329 × 558 mm (13 ×22 in)

300 × 900 mm (12 × 35 in)

203 × 203 mm (8 × 8 in) - 1,118 × 1,600 mm (44 × 63 in)

Paper

Note

• In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system” such as ISO

A or ANSI.

In Windows and Mac OS 9, some size systems are not available by default. Follow the steps below to make them available.

Windows:

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box.

2.


3.

Click Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.

4.

Select the Display Series check box.

Mac OS 9:

1.

In Chooser, choose GARO Printer Driver.

2.

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the dialog box for page settings.

3.

Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.

4.

Select the Display Series check box.

• For details on non-standard paper sizes, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.396)

• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

Handling Paper 177

Handling rolls

Handling rolls

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source

You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.

Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media

lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Roll Media lamp (a).

Note

• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

• If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.761)

• If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

• If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

• When in the process of loading paper

Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.

• When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks

Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.

• If the Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.

After you select the roll as the paper source, a message is displayed instructing you to load the roll. At this point, load the roll. (→P.182)

Note

• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, remove it before loading the roll.

(→P.186)

(→P.216)

178 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder

Note

• Printed rolls will not work correctly. Cut away the printed portion before loading the roll.

• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.169)

• Cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue.

Uneven, dirty, or sticky edges may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.

Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.

• Wind up the roll so that the edge is even across the roll.

• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load the paper.

1.

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

Handling Paper 179

Handling rolls

2.

With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the roll in the Roll Holder from the left. Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder.

Important

• Insert the roll rmly so that there is no gap between the roll and the ange of the Roll Holder. If there is a gap, it may cause feeding problems.

• Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause injury.

• When setting a roll, be careful to avoid hitting the roll holder ange hard with the roll. This may damage the Roll Holder.

3.

Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position shown (b), push it rmly in until the ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the

Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.

180 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder

1.

Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

2.

Remove the roll from the Roll Holder.

Important

• After removal, store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it again.

Handling Paper 181

Handling rolls

Loading the Roll in the Printer

Note

• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.

• Roll (→P.186)

• Sheet (→P.216)

• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.717)

1.

Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.

2.

With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the guide grooves (b) of the Roll Holder Slot on both sides.

Caution

• Be careful not to drop a roll and hurt yourself when loading the roll.

• Be careful not to put your ngers between the guide grooves (b) and the Roll Holder shaft (a) when loading roll. Otherwise, you may hurt yourself.

182 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

3.

Pull out the roll paper evenly on both ends, insert the roll paper in the Paper Feed Slot (a), and advance the roll paper until the roll paper touches the Paper Retainer.

After the paper reaches the Paper Retainer, it is automatically advanced over the Platen.

Important

• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing quality.

• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

• When loading paper that curls easily, lift the Release Lever to manually pull out the roll paper over the Platen.

• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.

4.

Lower the Ejection Guide.

Handling Paper 183

Handling rolls

5.

While holding the edge of the roll paper, lift the Release Lever.

6.

Hold the roll edge as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the Ejection Guide (a) using the both hands. Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b) so that the paper side is parallel to the line and lower the Release Lever.

Important

• Be sure to follow steps 5 and 6. If paper cannot be advanced straight or if it wrinkles, it may jam or rub against the Printhead.

• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight.

Note

• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is open. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Set vacuum stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three settings are available.

184 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

7.


After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display

Screen.

At this point, specify the paper type. (→P.188)

Handling Paper 185

Handling rolls

Removing the Roll from the Printer

Caution

• If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, always follow the steps below to remove rolls. You will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left if you move the Release Lever and remove the roll before the barcode is printed.

1.

Press the Load/Eject button.

A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the roll.

2.

Press the OK button.

The roll can now be removed.

Note

• If you need to cut the roll, execute Paper Cutting on the Control Panel. (→P.193)

• If you have selected Media Menu > Chk Remain.Roll > On in the printer menu and the printed document has been ejected, a barcode and brief text message are printed on the leading edge of rolls.

If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. In this case, cut the roll with scissors and remove the sheet.

3.


186 Handling Paper

4.

Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.

Handling rolls

5.

Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

6.

Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover.

Important

• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. Clean the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

• Setting CarriageScanWdth to Fixed on the Control Panel may reduce soiling on the underside of the paper. However, this requires more time for printing.

Handling Paper 187

Handling rolls

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)

When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.

Important

• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.

(→P.654)

(→P.653)

Note

• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the

Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.189)

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)By factory default, Plain

Paper is selected.

• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.

5.


188 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)

When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.

Note

• When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, Chk Remain.Roll must be set to On. If it is

Off, the Roll Length Set menu is not shown.

• After you specify the roll type, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the roll length on the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length Set, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Specify the roll length as follows.

1.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

2.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.

5.


Handling Paper 189

Handling rolls

Feeding Roll Paper Manually

You can bring the printer ofine by pressing the Online button.

When the printer is ofine and roll paper is selected as the paper source, you can advance or retract the roll by pressing ▲ or ▼.

Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.

Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.

If you hold down the ▲ or ▼ button for less than a second, the roll paper will move about 1 mm (0.039 in).

If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the paper will move until you release the button. Release the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.

190 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper

If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text is printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. If this function is activated and barcodes are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected when you load a roll. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.

Note

• Only the text message is printed if the document is not cut but kept in the printer, or if you are printing on clear lm.

Important

• If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.

Follow these steps to activate detection of the remaining roll paper.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chk Remain.Roll, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

Handling Paper 191

Handling rolls

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically

If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll.

Trim Edge First offers the following options.

• Automatic

If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 40 mm (1.6 in) or more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge, and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 40 mm. However, paper may sometimes be cut, depending on the state of the leading edge.

• Off

The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.

For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)

• On

The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper


Note

• If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv. to Loose for a higher skew detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.

192 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.

Automatic

Cutting Method

The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter

Unit following printer driver settings.

Cutting Mode

Menu Settings

Automatic

Eject Eject (→P.194) Choose this setting if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.

To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit , hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Manual

(→P.195)

Choose this setting when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit .

Cut the roll using scissors.

Manual

Paper Cutting

(→P.196)

Select this option to cut paper at the current position.

The roll is cut using the Cutter Unit .

Paper Cutting Yes

Cut rolls manually in the following cases:

Handling Paper 193

Handling rolls

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)

Important

• When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.

• Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the printing quality.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

7.

As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold down the Stop button for at least a second to cut the roll.

194 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit )

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

7.

Press the Online button.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

8.

Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.

9.


The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.

Handling Paper 195

Handling rolls

Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)

1.

After pressing the Online button to bring the printer ofine, press ▲ or ▼ to advance the roll paper to the position for cutting.

2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.

4.


After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.

Caution

• If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in some cases before cutting.

196 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls

The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up this function to be activated for some types of paper.

When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.

Important

• Do not activate this function for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or thin paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.

• Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before borderless printing.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.

The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.

Handling Paper 197

Handling rolls

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls

When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.

Windows

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box.

(→P.206)

2.

Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type.

3.

In the Media Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D

Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.

(→P.208)

198 Handling Paper

Mac OS X

1.


2.

Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type.

Handling rolls

3.



(→P.209)

Handling Paper 199

Handling rolls

Mac OS 9

1.


2.

Select the Main pane and click D Settings in A Media Type.

3.



(→P.210)

Note

• By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.

• To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting

Mode to Eject in the printer menu.

(→P.193)

200 Handling Paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.

Caution

• Remove any jammed paper promptly.

1.

Turn the printer off. (→P.19)

2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.

If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.

Handling rolls

Handling Paper 201

Handling rolls

Important

• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.

• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).

4.

Lift the Release Lever.

202 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

5.

Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.

Caution

• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.

6.

If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.

Important

• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer.

Handling Paper 203

Handling rolls

7.

Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the

Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b), keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.

Important


• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.

8.


9.


The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.

Note

• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.

1.

Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.

2.

Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.

3.

Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu to cut the edge.

(→P.193)

204 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Roll Holder Set

A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper. If you want to prepare a few rolls with paper of various types and widths for different purposes, it is convenient to have several sets ready. Sets are available for 2- and 3-inch paper cores. (2-inch versions match the set included with the printer.)



Handling Paper 205

Handling rolls

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows)

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

3.

Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

206 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,

Favorites, Utility, and Support.

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.538)

Handling Paper 207

Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click

Settings by Media Type.

Setting Item Description

A Media Type Select the paper type.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper

Reference Guide . (→P.169)

B Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying

Time setting is only valid for rolls.

(→P.198)

C Between Pages Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

D Between Scans Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

E Roll Paper Margin for

Safety

F Near End Margin

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

G Cut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H Calibration Value You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

I Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

208 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)


Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click








(→P.198)


D Between Scans

E

G

H

I

Roll Paper Margin for

Safety


Cut Speed

Automatic Cutting

Calibration Value

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.



Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .

You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

J Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

Handling Paper 209

Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)


Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click








(→P.198)




Safety




G Cut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H Automatic Cutting You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .


210 Handling Paper

Handling sheets for paper feed slots

Handling sheets for paper feed slots

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source

You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.

Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media

lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).

1.

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp (a).

Caution

• Paper jams may occur if you load paper other than the paper specied in the paper settings for the media source. If you insert the edge of a roll in the Paper Feed Slot after you have selected sheets as the type of paper in the media source on the Control Panel and specied the type and size of paper, the printer will prepare to print on the roll. If you print under these conditions, an error will occur when the roll is ejected. (→P.771)

Note

• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

• If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.761)

• If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

• If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

2.

Remove any loaded paper that will not be used. (→P.216)

Note

• If a roll is loaded, the roll paper is automatically ejected.

After you select the sheet as the paper source, a message is displayed instructing you to load the sheet.

At this point, load the sheet. (→P.212)

Handling Paper 211


Loading the Sheet in the Printer

Note

• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper


• Loading a sheet while a roll remains loaded may cause paper jams. We recommend removing the roll if you will load a sheet. (→P.186)

To prevent the roll from unwinding if you leave it loaded, wrap a sheet of paper around the roll and tape it to fasten it.

• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.717)

• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load the paper.

1.

If you send a print job from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the

Display Screen. Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover.

212 Handling Paper


Important


2.

With a sheet lengthwise and printing-side up, insert it between the Platen (a) and the Paper

Retainer (b). Align the edges of the sheet as follows.

1.

Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line (c) at right.

2.

Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line (d), as shown.

When inserted, sheets are automatically held by suction against the Platen.

Important

• Load a sheet so that it is parallel to the Paper Alignment Line at right (c). Loading paper askew will cause an error.

• Warped paper may rub against the Printhead. Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it.

Handling Paper 213


Note

• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is up. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Increase the vacuum by pressing the ▲ button or decrease it with the ▼ button. Three levels are available.

However, even if you increase the vacuum, it may not be sufcient to hold some types of paper against the Platen well. In this case, use your hand to load the paper.

• A sheet is held in place by vacuuming through holes on the Platen. Although the vacuuming may produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions, it does not indicate a problem. If the noise is distracting, try moving the paper over slightly to the left or right (up to 1 mm [0.039 in]) while keeping it parallel to the Paper Alignment Line.

• The vacuum remains on for about 30 seconds during loading. If you cannot nish loading a sheet during this time, pull the sheet away and reinsert it to start the vacuum suction again.

3.

Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.

The printer now starts feeding the paper.

After the paper is advanced, the printer automatically goes online and starts printing.

If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen.

In this case, select the type of paper. (→P.215)

Note

• When using the Output Stacker, if you will print on large, stiff sheets, we recommend adjusting the

Output Stacker into the lowest position to prevent printed sheets from being bent (→P.221)

214 Handling Paper


Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)

When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.

Note

• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169) Plain Paper is selected by factory default.

If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.

• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.

• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.150)

5.


Handling Paper 215


Removing the Sheet

1.

Press the Load/Eject button.

Note

• Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, press the Stop button to cancel printing, print job processing, or ink drying.

2.

Press the OK button to eject the paper.

The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.

3.

Open the Top Cover, lift the Release Lever, and remove the paper.

4.


216 Handling Paper

Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.

Caution


1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.


3.


Important


Handling Paper 217


4.


5.

If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.

6.

If the paper is not visible, lift the Ejection Guide, remove the Roll Holder, and remove the jammed paper from below.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer, and lower the Ejection Guide.

218 Handling Paper


7.


Important


8.


9.


Handling Paper 219


Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing

After loading sheets, if you select a type of paper in the printer menu with width detection deactivated, you will need to feed the paper a different way than usual. Specically, you must manually advance the paper to the position of printing.

In this case, advance the paper as far into the paper feed slot as possible because it will be printed starting at that position.

Manually advance paper as follows.

1.

When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.

If you select Width Detection ON, change the Media Detailed Settings information for that paper and use the regular feeding method.

2.

Keeping the right edge of the sheet aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a) on the right side of the printer, load the sheet so that the near edge is aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the platen.

3.

Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.

4.

After a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.

220 Handling Paper

Output Stacker

Using the Output Stacker

The Output Stacker can be installed at four positions, as shown.

Output Stacker

• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker

Use position (1).

• When the Output Stacker is not used

Use position (2).

• When the Media Take-up Unit is used, or when the Output Stacker is stored for long periods

Lower it to position (3) for storage. (→P.226)

When using the Output Stacker again after storage, reattach the Basket Rod on the front of the Output

Stacker to the tips of the left and right Basket Arms and pull the side rods out completely.

• When printing on large, stiff sheets

Use position (3).

Set it to position (4) for large-format printing or when printing on delicate paper. (→P.223)

Important

• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.

• The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.

• Before using the Output Stacker, remove the Rewind Spool. If you do not, it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly, and it they may be scratched.

• The Output Stacker can hold printed documents from rolls that are 62 inches (1,575 mm) long. When printing longer documents, eject them in front of the printer or use the optional Media Take-up Unit.

Handling Paper 221

Output Stacker

The Output Stacker locks into position if you lift it to position (1) or (2). To lower the Output Stacker, lift the front Basket Rod lightly to release the lock, and then lower the stacker.

222 Handling Paper

Output Stacker

Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of the printer

You can also set the Output Stacker to the following position for large-format printing or when printing on delicate paper.

Note

• Always choose Cutting Mode > Eject when the Output Stacker is in the position for ejection in the front of the printer. If you choose Automatic, printed documents may be damaged. (→P.193)

• During ejection in the front of the printer, be especially careful when using delicate paper or paper that curls easily.

• With some types of paper, the leading edge may curl or bend during ejection. In this case, straighten out the paper. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper is curled or bent.

• Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection.

In this case, free the paper from where it is caught. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper gets caught.

1.

Lift the Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all the way back.

Handling Paper 223

Output Stacker

2.

Remove the Output Stacker from the printer.

Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Arms, and remove the back Basket

Rod and the black cord from the Rod Holder.

3.

Store the left and right Basket Arms. Next, remove the Rod Holder Adapter, leaving the Rod

Holder attached, and put it in front of the printer.

224 Handling Paper

4.

Pull out the Basket Hooks from the left and right side of the Ejection Guide.

Output Stacker

5.

Attach the Basket Rod to the Basket Hooks so that the white tag of the Basket Cloth is on the left side.

6.

Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut, and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder.

Handling Paper 225

Output Stacker

Stowing the Output Stacker

Stow the Output Stacker if you will use the Media Take-up Unit or if you will not use the Output Stacker for an extended period.

1.

When the Output Stacker is in the position used when storing printed documents (a), lift the front

Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front (b), and push it all the way back.

2.

Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Arms. Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay.

Important

• When using the optional Media Take-up Unit, position the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor (indicated by the dashed line).

226 Handling Paper

3.

Push in the left and right Basket Arms toward the back all the way, until they stop.

Output Stacker

Handling Paper 227

Media take-up unit

Media take-up unit

Media Take-up Unit

This unit automatically winds up printed documents.

• Media Take-up Unit TU-06

Note



Reference Guide.


228 Handling Paper

Media take-up unit

Media Take-up Unit (Optional)

Use the optional Media Take-up Unit to have documents that are printed on rolls rewound automatically after printing. This is convenient for large-format printing, or when printing large-volume jobs continuously.

Note





Handling Paper 229

Media take-up unit

Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)

1.


2.

Enable the Media Take-up Reel function. (→P.231)

3.

Load the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.232)

4.

Turn the Media Take-up Unit on.

5.

Print on the roll.

6.

Turn the Media Take-up Unit off.

7.

Remove the printed document from the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.239)

8.

Disable the Media Take-up Unit function. (→P.231)

Important

• The Media Take-up Unit cannot be used with sheets.

• If you have attached the Output Stacker, always stow it before using the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.226)

Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.

• Do not put anything near the Media Take-up Sensor that might interfere with it. This may impair operation.

• Rolls are not cut automatically when the Media Take-up Unit is used, regardless of the Cutting Mode setting in the printer menu or the Automatic Cutting setting in the printer driver.

• Color tones after printing may change during the ink drying period for some types of paper. Allow ample drying time before the nal check of color tones, and do not remove printed documents from the

Media Take-up Unit too soon.

• In humid environments, documents with heavy ink coverage printed on thin Coated Paper may not be retracted evenly by the Media Take-up Unit. In this case, take steps to control humidity in the operating environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so that printed documents are handled after the ink has fully dried.

• In humid environments, documents printed on Fabric Banner and Synthetic Paper may not be retracted evenly by the Media Take-up Unit. In this case, take steps to control humidity in the operating environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so that printed documents are handled after the ink has fully dried.

230 Handling Paper

Enabling the Take-Up Reel Function

1.


2.

Select Take-up Reel → Enable and press the OK button.

Disabling the Take-Up Reel Function

1.


2.

Select Take-up Reel → Disable and press the OK button.

Media take-up unit

Handling Paper 231

Media take-up unit

Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit

1.

When using the Output Stacker, stow the Output Stacker before this procedure. (→P.226)

Important

• Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.

• Do not put anything in front of the Media Take-up Sensor that might interfere with it. This may impair operation.

2.

Unlock the ange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever (a) from the shaft side. Remove the ange.

3.

When rewinding rolls with 3-inch paper cores, insert the 3-inch Adapter on the anges at both ends.

4.

Insert the paper core, which serves as the spindle for rewinding a roll, on the Rewind Spool.

Important

• On the Rewind Spool, always use a paper core that is the same size as the roll to be rewound.

232 Handling Paper

Media take-up unit

5.

Push the anges in rmly until the paper core is secured in place and push down the lever

(a) toward the shaft.

Important

• After pushing in the anges rmly, make sure the paper core is secure and does not move around.

Move the paper core left and right. If there is a gap between the anges and paper core, repeat steps 2-4.

6.

Load the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit so that the gear of the Rewind Spool (a) meshes with the gear of the Right Media Take-up Unit (b).

Important

• If you attempt to load the Rewind Spool with the left and right ends inverted by mistake, the Media

Take-up Unit cannot be turned on.

• If the gear of the Rewind Spool (a) does not mesh with the gear of the Right Media Take-up Unit (b), the Media Take-up Unit cannot be turned on.

7.


Handling Paper 233

Media take-up unit

8.


9.


The roll is now advanced to the Media Take-up Unit.

10.

Hold the roll paper by the middle of the leading edge and align the right edge with the right edge of the paper core of the Rewind Spool. With the left and right edges of the roll paper evenly taut, tape the middle to the paper core to fasten it.

11.

Making sure the roll paper is not slack, tape the left and right side of the leading edge to the paper core.

Note

• When rewinding heavyweight paper, use strong adhesive tape to fasten it.

234 Handling Paper

Media take-up unit

12.

Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine, and then press ▼ to loosen the tension of the roll.

13.

On the Right Media Take-up Unit, pull the Rewind Mode Switch forward to turn it on. Press

▼ to rewind the roll so that it is nearly taut.

Important

• Rewind the paper so that the paper core makes at least two revolutions. If the paper is not rewound two full revolutions, repeat steps 11 and 12.

• Do not manually force the Rewind Spool or paper core to rotate them. This may damage them. To rewind or unwind rolls, press ▲ or ▼ on the Media Take-up Unit.

Handling Paper 235

Media take-up unit

14.

You can unwind rolls by holding down ▼ on the Control Panel.

15.

Use a combination of Weight Roll, Weight Joint, and Weight Flange that matches the roll type and width.

The following list identies Weight Roll and Weight Flange you can use. Color Label is applied to each Weight Roll.

Weight Roll

Roll Width

B2 Width: 515.0 mm (20.3 in)

B1 Width: 728.0 mm (28.7 in)

B0 Width: 1,030.0 mm (40.6 in)

A1 Width: 594.0 mm (23.4 in)

A0 Width: 841.0 mm (33.1 in)

431.8 mm (17 in)

609.6 mm (24 in)

762.0 mm (30 in)

914.4 mm (36 in)

1,066.8 mm (42 in)

1,117.6 mm (44 in)

“D”

“A”+“E”

“A”+“G”

“E”

“B”+“E”

“C”

“E”

“B”+“D”

“G”

“C”+“E”

“D”+“E”

Weight Roll to Use

236 Handling Paper

Media take-up unit

Weight Flange

Roll Type Weight Flange to Use

Glossy Photo Paper , Semi-Glossy Photo Paper ,

Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper , Heavyweight

SemiGlossy Photo Paper , Fine Art Photo Paper

, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Paper , Fine Art

Textured Paper , Canvas Matte , Fine Art Block

Print , Fine Art Watercolor , Proong paper ,

Coated Paper , Heavyweight Coated Paper , Extra

Heavyweight Coated Paper , Colored Coated

Paper , Synthetic Paper , Adhesive Synthetic Paper

, Backprint Film , Backlit Film , Flame-Resistant

Cloth , Fabric Banner , Thin Fabric Banner

Weight Flange 1 (*1)

Premium Matte Paper Weight Flange 2

*1: If you cannot retract stiff paper well using Weight Flange 1 or if the diameter of the retracted paper is wider than the Rewind Spool, use Weight Flange 2. When using Weight Flange 2, adjust the paper feed amount by executing Auto Band Adj. (→P.654)

Note

• Do not use combinations other than those identied here.

• Insert the Weight Flange and Weight Joint rmly on the Weight Roll.

• Use identical Weight Flanges on the left and right ends. Insert matching Weight Flanges (1 or

2) on both ends of the Weight Roll.

• Keep unused Weight Roll, Weight Joint, and Weight Flange handy by putting them in the box and putting the box under the Stand.

16.

Set the Weight Roll gently on top of the slack in the roll paper.

Important

• Always set the Weight Roll on the paper. Failure to do this may cause rewinding problems.

• When setting the Weight Roll on the paper, avoid touching the paper core and causing the wound roll to become out of alignment on the left and right end.

Handling Paper 237

Media take-up unit

17.


The Media Take-up Unit is now ready for use. Printed rolls can now be rewound automatically.

Note

• When the Media Take-up Unit is in use, an icon indicating the take-up mode is shown on the

Display Screen.

238 Handling Paper

Media take-up unit

Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take-up

Unit (Optional)

1.


2.

Hold down the ▼ button to advance the roll a little.

To protect the paper that has been rewound, advance it an amount longer than the outer circumference.

3.

Remove the Weight Roll from the roll paper.

4.


Handling Paper 239

Media take-up unit

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes. As you hold the trailing edge of the printed document, press the

OK button.

The roll is now cut.

Important

• Always hold the trailing edge of printed documents when cutting rolls. If you do not hold the documents, they may fall on the oor and the printed surface may become soiled.

7.

Hold the trailing edge of the printed document and press the ▼ button on the Media Take-up Unit to rewind the printed documents.

Apply adhesive tape to the rewound paper to hold it in place, if necessary.

Important

• Be careful not to scratch the printed surface.

8.

Turn off the Media Take-up Unit by pushing in the Rewind Mode Switch.

240 Handling Paper

9.

Remove the Rewind Spool from the Media Take-up Unit.

Media take-up unit

Important

• Always turn off the Media Take-up Unit before removing the Rewind Spool. The Media Take-up Unit may be damaged if you do not turn it off rst.

• Remove the Rewind Spool, pulling off both ends from the Media Take-up Unit at once.

10.

Unlock the ange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever (a) from the shaft side. Remove the ange.

11.

Remove the entire paper core with the rewound printed documents from the Rewind Spool.

Note

• You can leave the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit even when it is not used for rewinding rolls.

Handling Paper 241

Print quality and color settings

Enhanced Printing Options

Print quality and color settings

Choosing a Paper for Printing

Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.

Media type

The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.

Note

• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. For information about the Media Conguration

Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.

If the paper type is not listed for selection

If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proong paper as a special paper (Special 1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.

For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.188)

• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)

242 Enhanced Printing Options


Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

Advanced Settings

For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing.

Note

• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing application.

For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.

• Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)

• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)

• Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)

Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Print Priority (*1) Description

Image A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.

Line Drawing/Text Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing detailed text in printed documents.

However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.

Ofce Document Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics, such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.

*1: Options suitable for the selected paper type are listed under Print Priority.

Enhanced Printing Options 243


Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Print Quality (*1) Description

Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.

Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in

“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Standard

Draft

Print Priority

Image

Image

Line Drawing/Text

Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.

Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.

Image


Ofce Document

Choose this setting to print faster.

Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when checking layouts.

Image


*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.



Color Settings

Setting Item

Color Mode (*1)

Color Adjustment (Images)

Color Adjustment (Graphics)

Color Adjustment (Text)

Gray Adjustment

Color-Matching Modes

Options

Color

Color (Economy)

Monochrome (Photo) )

Monochrome

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone Adjustment

Color Balance

Brightness

Contrast

Highlight

Shadow

Driver Matching Mode

ICC Matching Mode

Off

Description

Choose whether to print in color or monochrome (*4).

(→P.254)

You can adjust the levels of cyan, magenta, and yellow as well as the brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray tone separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

If you choose Monochrome in

Color Mode only Brightness and

Contrast can be adjusted.

Choose the gray tone color balance

( Cool Black or Warm Black ) and adjust levels of brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow as desired.

These levels can be adjusted when

Monochrome (Photo) is selected in Color Mode .

Choose the color-matching mode.

Other color-matching modes may be provided by the computer operating system, such as ICM and ColorSync.

Choose the color-matching method. The available options vary depending on your selection in “Color-Matching Mode.”

Color-Matching Method (*2) Auto

Perceptual

Saturation

Colorimetric

Others sRGB

Adobe RGB

Color Space (*3) Choose a standard color space

( sRGB ) or an expanded color space ( Adobe RGB ).

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.

*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.

*3: Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is selected.

*4: For monochrome printing, set Print Quality in the printer driver to High or Highest.



Enhancing Printing Quality

Setting Item

Thicken Fine Lines (*1)

Unidirectional Printing

High-Precision Printing

Description

Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD drawings or similar documents.

Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing results if lines are printed crooked or images are uneven. However, it takes more time than regular printing.

Enables printing at the highest level of quality.

However, this requires more time than usual for printing.

*1: Displayed in Windows and Mac OS 9.

Note

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

• For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.259)

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.261)

• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS 9) (→P.264)



Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Setting optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Draft Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Photo (Standard)

Photo (Adobe RGB)

Photo (Monochrome)

Poster (Photos)

Poster (Text, Illustrations)

Scanned Image

Setting optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Setting optimized for printing in colors matching those of images created using the Adobe RGB color space.

Setting optimized for printing monochrome photos in the neutral black image tone of conventional lm photographs.

Suitable for printing posters composed mainly of photographs.

Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.

Setting optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.



Caution

• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note

• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.

• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing”. (→P.243)

• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.297)

• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.299)



Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Settings optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Photos (High Image Quality) Setting optimized for printing photographic images at a higher level of quality.

Photo (from digital camera)

Photo (Monochrome)

Adobe RGB Images

Poster (Graphic Image)

POP Ad

Settings optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Setting optimized for printing monochrome photos in the neutral black image tone of conventional lm photographs.

Settings optimized for printing in colors matching those of images created using the Adobe RGB color space.

Settings optimized for printing posters mainly composed of photos and images.

Settings optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.



Scanned Image

Print Target

Draft

Description

Settings optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.

Settings optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Caution


Note




• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)



Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

Poster (Notice Announcement)

Description

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

3D CAD, GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

CAD (Line Drawing) Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Note




For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.284)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.286)



Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

Poster (Notice Announcement)

Description

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

3D-CAD/GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

CAD (Line Drawing) Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Note




For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.




Printing Ofce Documents


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for ofce documents

Print Target

Ofce Document

Description

Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce documents such as handouts.

Note




For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.291)

• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.293)

• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9) (→P.295)



Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

Color Mode

Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.

The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Color Mode Description

Color Print in color.

Color (Economy)

Color Adjustment

You can adjust the color balance and color-matching method.

This mode requires less ink than regular color printing.

You can adjust the color balance.

Monochrome (Photo) Grayscale printing optimized for monochrome photos.

Monochrome Print in grayscale.

You can adjust the color balance in ways tailored to monochrome photos.

You can adjust the color balance.

Color Adjustment

You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Adjustment Item Description

Cyan Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan

, Magenta , and Yellow .

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone Adjustment (Gray Tone)

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.



Matching

You can choose the color-matching mode and method.

By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images more closely.

Matching Mode Description Notes

Driver Matching Mode Color adjustment based on the original color prole of the printer driver

This is the default color-matching method. Normally, use Driver

Matching Mode .

ICC Matching Mode You can select the printer prole in the Printer Prole Settings list.

Driver ICM Mode

Host ICM Mode

ColorSync

Off (No Correction)

Color adjustment based on ICC color proles (an international standard) using the printer driver

Color adjustment based on the standard Windows ICM function.

The printer driver adjusts the colors.

Color adjustment based on the standard Windows ICM function.

Windows adjusts the colors.

Color adjustment based on the standard Mac OS ColorSync function. Mac OS adjusts the colors.

No color-matching

Available when using Windows

2000, Windows XP, or Windows

Server 2003/Windows Vista

Available when using the Mac OS

Choose this option for color-matching by the software application or with your own color prole, when you want to disable color-matching by the printer driver.

Note

• If you select Color (Economy) in Color Mode, Driver Matching Mode is selected in Matching Mode.



Auto

Matching Method

Perceptual

Colorimetric

Description

Color-matching optimized for images, graphics, or text

Color-matching optimized for photos. Print images with smooth gradations and colors closer to those as displayed on the screen.

Color-matching with adjustment to remove color from white area.

Without white adjustment, colors are added to white area.

Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr) Color-matching without white adjustment to reect the prole of original data. Without white adjustment, colors are added to white area.

Saturation Color-matching optimized for graphics. This option emphasizes color saturation.

Notes

The available options and their display order varies depending on your selection in Color-Matching

Mode, as well as the operating system.

Gray Adjustment

The following settings can be adjusted if “Monochrome (Photo)” is selected in Color Mode.

Gray Adjustment

Items

Color Balance

Description

Enables you to adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos.

Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.

Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

Brightness

Contrast

Highlight

Shadow

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.


Adjust levels of image highlight areas.

Adjust levels of image shadow areas.

Note

• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.267)

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.270)

• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.273)



Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment

You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.

There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing

On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important

• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.

• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.

• This function is only supported in Windows.

For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:

• By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.667)

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light

Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.

Important

• This function requires the Eye-One spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.

• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.

• For a list of supported Eye-One devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure

Tool.


For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:

• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.671)



Printing Photos in Monochrome

The following settings are available for monochrome printing.

Main Easy

Settings

Print

Target

Photo

(Monochrome)

A mode optimized for printing monochrome images with maximum expressiveness through simple operations.

Choosing Photo (Monochrome) in Easy Settings applies image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute minimum, suppressing color shift and achieving consistent gray balance.

• Photo (Monochrome) is not available for all types of paper.

• Printing that matches the pure neutral black of conventional photos (silver-halide prints) is possible.

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) (→P.305)

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.307)

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.310)

Advanced

Settings

Color

Mode

Monochrome

(Photo)

A mode for printing monochrome images with maximum expressiveness by specifying detailed settings. In these settings, you can specify to apply image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute minimum, suppress color shift, and achieve consistent gray balance. You can also ne-tune the color balance by selecting “Warm Black,” “Cool Black”, and so on.

• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color

Adjustment sheet.

• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.

Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos

(Windows) (→P.276)


(Mac OS X) (→P.278)


(Mac OS 9) (→P.281)

Monochrome Deactivates color printing so that images are printed in monochrome, with continuous-tone color data printed using gray midtones. Use this mode to print ofce documents or graphics in monochrome, or if the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome (Photo) setting.

• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color

Adjustment sheet.

• If the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome

(Photo) setting, choose Monochrome .

• Because color ink is used to produce gray continuous-tone images, the gray may appear to have a tinge of color.


(Windows) (→P.276)


(Mac OS X) (→P.278)


(Mac OS 9) (→P.281)



Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to print CAD drawings in monochrome.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.



6.

Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.

7.

Click Standard (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note

• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

8.

Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.

9.

To adjust the brightness and contrast, click H Color Settings.

Note

• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.

(→P.254)

10.


11.

Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Media Source, and so on.

12.

Conrm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.508)




(Mac OS X)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

In the application menu, choose Print.

6.




7.


8.


9.

Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.

10.

Click Standard(600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note


11.

Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.

12.

To adjust the brightness and contrast, click I Set.

Note


(→P.254)


13.



14.

Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size.

15.

Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)




(Mac OS 9)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.



7.


8.

Click E Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.


9.

Click Line Drawing in the F Print Priority list.

10.

Click Standard(600dpi) in the G Print Quality list.

Note

• Options displayed in the G Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

11.

Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.

12.

To adjust brightness and contrast, click I Set.

Note


(→P.254)



13.


14.

Conrm the selection in A Media Source.

15.

Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.

Note

• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)



Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click Color in the G Color Mode list.



7.

Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.

8.

On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


C Cyan Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,

Magenta , and Yellow .

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

G Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.


H Saturation

I Gray Tone Adjustment


Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

9.

Close the Color Settings dialog box.


10.



11.


12.


Note

• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.508)



Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



8.



9.

Click Color in the H Color Mode list.

10.

Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.



11.

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.




D Magenta

E Yellow




H Saturation

I Gray Tone



12.

Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

13.


14.


15.


Note

• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)



Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.




11.

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.




D Magenta

E Yellow




H Saturation

I Gray Tone



12.


13.


14.


15.


Note




Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to

ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click Monochrome (Photo) in the G Color Mode list.

Note

• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.


7.



8.

On the Gray Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

9.

Close the Color Settings dialog box.

10.


11.


12.


Note





(Mac OS X)



1.


2.

Select the print target in the B Format for list.

3.


4.


5.

In the source application menu, choose Print.

6.


7.



8.



9.

Click Monochrome (Photo) in the H Color Mode list.

Note


10.


11.

On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

12.




13.


14.


15.


Note





(Mac OS 9)



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.

Click Monochrome (Photo) in the H Color Mode list.

Note


10.


11.

On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


12.



13.


14.


Note




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

• Document: CAD drawing

• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Plain Paper

• Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.


2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.538)

3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print

Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.


6.



7.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3.

8.

Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.

9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm).

10.

Specify additional printing conditions.


11.


Note




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)



• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.

Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..


9.



10.

Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.

11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,

ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane and update the printer information.



12.

Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C

Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

13.



14.


Note







• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.

4.


5.


6.


7.

In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the F Print

Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.



9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main pane and update the printer information.

12.



13.


Note




Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.

• Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note




6.

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setupsheet.

7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

8.

Select sheets in the L Media Source list.

9.



10.


Caution


Note




Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)


• Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs


• Paper: Sheets



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set.



9.


10.

Click Sheets in the A Media Source list.

11.

Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page

Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

12.



13.


Note




Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9)


• Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs


• Paper: Sheets



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the F Print Target list.

Note




9.


10.

Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.

11.



12.


Note




Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

• Document: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper

• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy

Photo Paper.

In the A Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated

Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)

5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) in the E Print

Target list.

Note




6.


7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".

8.


9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.

Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.

10.



11.


Note




Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)



• Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll

• Paper Type: Glossy Photo Paper

• Roll paper Width: 10 inches (254 mm)

1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

4.


5.


6.




7.


Photo Paper.

Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) in the E Print

Target list.

Note


9.


10.




11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note


12.


Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13.



14.


Note




Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll


• Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0mm)

1.


2.


3.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

4.


5.


6.




7.

In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy

Photo Paper.

In the C Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,

Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

8.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (from digital camera) in the

F Print Target list.

Note


9.


10.




11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note


12.



13.


Note




Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.

• Original: Photo image from a digital camera

• Page size: 10×12 inches

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


Photo Paper.

In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,


Note





5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print

Target list.

Caution

• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.

Note


6.


7.


8.


9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.

Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.

10.



11.


Note




Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


Photo Paper.

In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,


Note



8.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print

Target list.

Caution


Note


9.


10.




11.


in. (254.0mm).

Note



12.


Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13.



14.


Note




Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


Photo Paper.

In the C Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,


Note



8.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the F Print

Target list.

Caution


Note


9.


10.




11.


in. (254.0mm).

Note

• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the

Main pane to update the printer information.

12.



13.


Note



Printing enlargements or reductions

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Media Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.338)

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.340)

• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.343)

Note

• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of

150 dpi or more at actual size.



Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width




Fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.330)

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.332)

• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9) (→P.335)

Note





Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value




Scaling

Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.321)

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.323)

• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS 9) (→P.326)

Note





Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the following topic.

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.317)

• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.319)



Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.

1.

Register a hot folder on your computer

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy.

2.

Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer

Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.206)

2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3.

Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.



Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the

Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.

For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1.

Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2.

Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3.

Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4.

Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specied for the folder.

Note

• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy Guide .



Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically enlarged according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.



1.

Register a hot folder on your computer.


2.







1.

To display the GARO ExtraKit dialog box, either double-click the GARO ExtraKit icon after navigating to Applications - Canon Utilities - imagePROGRAF, or click C Set on the Utility pane.

2.

In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the GARO

ExtraKit utility.





Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note


Copy Guide .



Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

• Document: Any type


• Paper: Roll


• Roll paperr width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Important

• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

6.


7.




8.


(420.0mm).

9.


10.

Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11.

Click ISO A4 in the G Media Size list.

12.

Click F Scaling and enter “120.”

Note

• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting G Print Centered on the Layout sheet.

13.


Note




Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS

X)




• Paper: Roll



Important


1.


2.


3.

In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.


5.


6.




7.


8.


9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.

Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13.

Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14.

Click G Scaling and enter “120.”

Note


• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered check box.

15.


Note




Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS

9)




• Paper: Roll



Important


1.


2.


3.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.


5.


6.




7.


8.

Select the print target in the F Print Target list.

9.


10.


11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, ISO

A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.


13.

Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the


14.




15.


Note


• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting F Print Centered on the Finishing pane.

16.

Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.

Note




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6.




7.


8.


9.


Note

• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

10.

Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.

Note

• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.

• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11.


Note




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



9.



10.


11.


in. (406.4mm).

Note




12.



13.


14.

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.

15.


Note




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll paper width, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


10.


11.


in. (406.4mm).

Note



12.



13.



14.


15.


16.


Note




Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

• Document: Any Type

• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


8.


(420.0mm).

9.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.

10.


11.

Select the D Fit Media Size check box.

12.

Click ISO A3 in the G Media Size list.

13.


Note




Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



9.



10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.



13.


14.

Make sure E Fit Media Size is selected.

15.

Click ISO A3 in the I Media Size list.

16.


Note




Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.

Select the printing application in the F Print Target list.



9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note



12.



13.



14.


15.

Make sure D Fit Media Size is selected.

16.

Click ISO A3 in the H Media Size list.

17.


Note



Printing at full size

Printing at full size

Printing on Oversized Paper

Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for a margin. (→P.141) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use an oversized paper size.

For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and cut away the excess margin.

Note

• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will not be printed.

Oversize

The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.

a. Regular paper size: Gray area not printed b. Page Size c. Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)

Important

• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin required by the printer.

• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 28 mm (1.10 in) higher than the page size

• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 10 mm (0.39 in) higher than the page size

• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing. (→P.175)



Note

• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized printing on sheets, choose Cut Sheet as the media source.

• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and print on it.

• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Media

Size. Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size.” (→P.396)

For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.358)

• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.360)

• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.363)



Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper


• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

1.

On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

2.

Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.



Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

• Not all page sizes are available.

• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.350)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.352)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.355)



Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll

• Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper


1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note

• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight

Coated Paper.

6.



7.



8.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.

In this case, click 10"x12".

9.


10.

Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll

(254.0mm).

12.

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13.

In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.

14.


Note




Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)



• Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless.

Note

• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”

4.


5.

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

6.


7.




8.


Coated Paper.

9.


10.


11.


12.

Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.


in. (254.0mm).

Note




13.


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

14.


Note




Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll


• Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.


2.


3.

In D Print Area Setting, click H For Broderless Printing.

4.

In the A Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.

In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight

Coated Paper.

10.


11.


12.


13.



in. (254.0mm).

Note




14.


15.


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

16.


Note




Printing at Full Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)


• Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click O Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.

7.

In the Media Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.



8.

Click OK to close the Media Size Options dialog box.

9.

Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.

10.


11.


(420.0mm).

12.


Note


Note

• You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected

Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format

Oversize - xxxxxx.



Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.

Note

• For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize.”

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.




9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.


Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.

13.


Note




Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In D Print Area Setting, click G For printing oversizes.

4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


9.




10.


11.


12.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note


13.


Note



Borderless Printing


Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size




Important









1.


2.





Borderless Printing

Fit Media Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

Note

• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.387)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.389)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.392)


Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll

Width




Important









1.


2.





Borderless Printing

Scale to t Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note

• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width

(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.379)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.381)

• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9) (→P.384)


Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size




Important









1.


2.





Borderless Printing

Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

• Not all page sizes are available.

• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.


• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.350)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.352)

• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.355)


Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)




• Paper: Roll



1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note


• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



Borderless Printing

7.


8.



9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.

14.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Coated Paper.

9.



Borderless Printing

10.


11.


12.



in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

13.


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

14.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In D Print Area Setting, click H For Broderless Printing.

4.

In the A Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note


5.


6.


7.


8.



Borderless Printing

9.


Coated Paper.

10.


11.


12.


13.



in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

14.


15.



16.


Note



Borderless Printing


Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


Note


2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



Borderless Printing

7.


8.


9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.

14.


Note



Borderless Printing


Width (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.

4.


5.


6.


7.



Borderless Printing

8.


Coated Paper.

9.


10.


11.


12.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

13.



14.


15.

Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced

Printing.

16.


Note



Borderless Printing


Width (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.

4.


5.


6.


7.



Borderless Printing

8.


Coated Paper.

9.


10.


11.


12.


in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

13.


14.



15.


16.

Select the G Borderless Printing check box.

This ensures that E Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in C Enlarged/Reduced

Printing.

17.


Note



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the

Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


Note


2.


3.


4.


5.


Coated Paper.

6.



Borderless Printing

7.


8.


9.


10.


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Media Size.

14.

Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.

15.


Note



Borderless Printing


Paper Size (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.


5.


6.


7.



Borderless Printing

8.


Coated Paper.

9.


10.


11.


12.


in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

13.



14.

On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

15.

Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

16.

Click E Fit Media Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

17.

In I Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

18.


Note



Borderless Printing


Paper Size (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


Note

• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.


5.


6.


7.



Borderless Printing

8.


Coated Paper.

9.


10.


11.


12.


in. (254.0mm).

Note



Borderless Printing

13.


14.



15.


16.

Select the G Borderless Printing check box.

17.

Click D Fit Media Size under C Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

18.

In H Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

19.


Note



Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format

Printing)

You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.

Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.

Fit Roll Paper Width

You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the full width of rolls.

Note

• The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd (when printing in Mac OS X).

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.406)

• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.410)

• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9) (→P.413)

Important

• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.

• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.

• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.



Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.

There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver

After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose them anytime as needed.

Note

• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Media Size in

Windows and Mac OS 9. In Mac OS X, they are called “Custom Sizes.”

Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use

Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.

Note

• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.397)

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.401)

• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9) (→P.403)



Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.

• Printing by using Custom Size (→P.397)

• Printing by using Custom Media Size (→P.399)

Printing by using Custom Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.

• Document: Scanned image

• Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

1.

Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target list.



7.


8.

Click Cut Sheet in the L Media Source list.

9.

Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

10.

Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

1.

Select mm or inch in Units.

2.

Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.

11.

Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

12.


Note




Printing by using Custom Media Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. First, register a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Media Size.


• Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])

• Paper: Sheets



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.

Complete the following settings in the Media Size Options dialog box.

1.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “430 mm Square” is used in this example.

2.

Select mm or inch in Units.

3.

Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.

Note

• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either

Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.

10.

Click Add to register “430 mm Square.”

11.


12.


13.

In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square."

14.


Note




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.



• Paper: Sheets



Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

Create the document in the application.

2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

6.

In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and

Width.

7.

In Printer Margins, enter “0.5” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.

Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name-in this case, “430*430”.

9.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

10.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size you registered.

11.


12.




13.


14.


15.


16.


17.


18.

In D Easy Settings, make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

19.


Note




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9)

This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in Custom Media Size. Document:



• Paper: Sheets



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Enter a paper name of your choice in B Custom Name. “430*430” is used in this example.

7.

In F Media Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “430” in H Hght and G

Wid..

8.

Click J Add to add the paper size named “430*430”.



9.

Access the Page Attribute dialog box.

10.

In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size you registered.

11.

In D Print Area Setting, click E Standard.

12.

Click Cut Sheet in the E Standard list.

13.


14.


15.


16.


17.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the F Print Target list.


18.



19.


20.


Note





Printing; Windows)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

• Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word

• Page size: Non-standard (100 × 500 mm [3.4 × 19.7in])

• Paper: Roll


• Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

Register a Custom Media Size.

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100 ×

500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in) is registered.

2.

In the application, create an original in the size you registered.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Media Size

This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.

6.

In Units, click mm.

7.

Under Media Size, enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height.



8.

Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”

9.


10.

Close the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not available after you exit the application.

For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.397)

Creating the banner in the application

Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Media Size you registered.

1.

Start Microsoft Word.

2.

Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.

3.

Under Paper Size, click the Custom Media Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this example.

Important

• If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.

• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100 × 500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in)

4.

Set the printing orientation to horizontal

5.

Create the banner.

Printing the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.

Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.

2.


3.




4.


5.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the

E Print Target list.

6.


7.

In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner."

8.


Note

• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.



9.


10.

After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll

(406.4mm), and then click OK.

12.


Note


Note

• If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1.

On the Layout sheet, click M Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2.

In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.




Printing; Mac OS X)


• Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

• Page size: Non-standard (100 × 500 mm [3.4 × 19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll



Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

Register a “Custom Page Size.”

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup. In this example, 100 × 500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in) is registered.

3.


Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

Register a Custom Page Size

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

5.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter “100*500.”

If the Untitled size is not visible in the list at left, click + below the list.

6.

Under Page Size, enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.



7.

Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

9.

In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size you registered.

10.

In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

11.


Printing the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.


2.


3.


4.

After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the

E Print Target list.



5.


6.


7.


in. (406.4mm).

Note


8.

In C Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

9.


10.

Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.

11.


Note





Printing; Mac OS 9)


• Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

• Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm, [3.9×19.7 in])

• Paper: Roll



The steps to print a vertical or horizontal banner are as follows.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

Register a Custom Media Size in Media Design.

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

3.


Register a Custom Media Size

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Enter a desired paper name in B Custom Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.

6.

In C Units, click D mm.



7.

Under F Media Size, enter “100” in G Wid. and “500” in H Hght.

8.

Click J Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”

9.

Access the Page Attribute dialog box.

10.

In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, “My Horizontal Banner.”

11.

In B Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

12.




Print the banner

Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.


2.


3.


4.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the F Print Target list.

5.


6.




7.


in. (254.0mm).

Note


8.


9.

In B Page Size, make sure “My Horizontal Banner” is displayed, as registered in Media Design.

10.


11.


12.


Note



Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.

Free Layout (Windows)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.



imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.

Important

• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.426)

• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.428)



Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Roll paper (banner)

Important

• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.


• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.430)

• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.431)

• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9) (→P.433)



Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.

Page Layout

Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.

Note

• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.

• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

Important

• This function cannot be combined with the following options.

• Borderless Printing

• Scaling Originals (Windows)

• Banner Printing (Windows)

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.435)

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.437)

• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) (→P.440)



Printing Posters in Sections

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

Page Layout

Choose poster printing.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.422)

• Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9) (→P.424)

Note

• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.



Printing Large Posters (Windows)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

• Document: Poster

• Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Sheets ( Manual )

• Paper Type: Glossy Paper

• Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.

5.

Click Poster (Photos) or Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the E Print Target list.

6.




7.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click

ISO A2.

8.

Click Manual in the L Media Source list.

9.

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10.

Select the A Page Layout check box.

11.

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the B Page Layout list.

Note

• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.

1.

Click C Set under B Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.

2.

On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.

3.

Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12.


Note




Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

• Document: Poster

• Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.

In D Print Area Setting, click E Standard.

5.

Click Cut Sheet in the E Standard list.

6.


7.


8.


9.


Photo Paper.



10.

After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Graphic Image) in the F Print

Target list.

11.


12.

Select the I Page Layout check box.

13.

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the I Page Layout list.

14.

In the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of any portion you do not want to print.

15.


16.


17.


Note




Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click Free Layout in the B Page Layout list.



7.

When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

9.

Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .



Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout.

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.



4.

Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free

Layout help topic.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .



Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important



1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

5.


6.

Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the L Media Source list.

7.

Conrm the print settings and start printing.

Note




Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)


Important



1.


2.


3.

Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4.


5.


6.


7.

In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

8.

Make your selection in the E Print Target list.



9.


10.

Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Media Source list.

11.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9)


Important



1.


2.


3.

Click the original size in the A Page Size list.

4.


5.


6.


7.

In the C Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

8.

Make your selection in the F Print Target list.



9.


10.

Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Media Source list.

11.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.


• Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").



8.


9.


(420.0mm).

10.


11.


12.

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the B Page Layout list.

Note

• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page

Layout Printing dialog box by clicking C Set.

13.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)



• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Access the Layout pane.

7.

Click 4 in the A Pages per Sheet list.

Note

• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout

Direction and C Border (or Border ).



8.


9.


10.


11.


12.




13.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note


14.



15.


Note




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9)



• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



9.



10.

Select the I Page Layout check box.

11.

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the I Page Layout list.

Note

• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in J Layout

Direction and K Page Border.

12.


13.




14.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note


15.


Note



Centering originals

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals relative to roll paper width

If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.445)

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.447)

• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) (→P.450)


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals on sheets

If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.453)

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.455)

• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9) (→P.457)


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll


• Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



Centering originals

8.


9.


(297.0mm).

10.


11.

Select the G Print Centered check box.

12.


Note



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Centering originals

9.


10.


11.


10-in. Roll.

Note



Centering originals

12.



13.

Select the J Print Centered check box.

14.

Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.

Note



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.



Centering originals

9.


10.



11.



Centering originals

12.


13.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO

A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note


14.

Select the F Print Centered check box.

15.


Note



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.


• Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



Centering originals

8.


9.

Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.

10.


11.


12.


13.

Select the G Print Centered check box.

14.


Note


Important

• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the media source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.


Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4/Letter

• Paper: Sheets


• Paper size: Non-standard

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the application software menu, choose Print.

5.


6.


7.



Centering originals

8.


9.


10.



11.

Select the J Print Centered check box.

12.


Note


Important



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4/Letter

• Paper: Sheets ( Manual )


• Paper size: Non-standard

1.

Choose Page Setup from the source application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.



Centering originals

8.


9.

Make sure B Page Size shows the original size as specied in Page Setup in the Page


10.



Centering originals

11.


12.

Select the F Print Centered check box.

13.


Note


Important



Conserving roll paper

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important

• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll

Paper Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.469)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.471)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9) (→P.474)



Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

Important

• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.

• Banner printing

• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note

• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.

• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.462)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.464)

• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9) (→P.467)



Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.




6.


7.


8.


(297.0mm).

9.


10.

Select the I No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.

11.


Note




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note




11.



12.

Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

13.


Note




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note


11.

Select the H No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

12.


Note





(Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.


• Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


8.


(297.0mm).

9.

Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.

10.


Note





(Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.


• Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

• Paper: Roll



This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note




11.



12.

Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

13.


Note





(Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.



• Paper: Roll


• Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.


ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note


11.

Select the I Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

12.


Note



Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise drawings from CAD applications.

For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.284)

• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.286)




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)



• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Target list.

Note


6.




7.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3.

8.


9.


(420.0mm).

10.



11.


Note




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)



• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.


8.


Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..



9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.


Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

13.



14.


Note





• Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.




6.


7.


8.


Target list.

Note


9.


10.




11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note


12.



13.


Note



Other useful settings

Other useful settings

Printing With Watermarks

You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

Watermark

Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.

Important

• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

The following watermarks are provided:

• CONFIDENTIAL (Windows)

• COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

• DRAFT (Windows and Mac OS 9)

• FILE COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

• FINAL (Windows)

• PRELIMINARY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

• PROOF (Windows)

• TOP SECRET (Windows and Mac OS 9)

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.

• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.

• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.

• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.

Note

• Watermarks are supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.

• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows. In Mac

OS 9, you can use up to 50 original watermarks including the watermarks provided.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:

• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.501)

• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) (→P.503)



Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation

You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.

Orientation

Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

Rotate 180 degrees

The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

Mirror

A mirror image of the original is printed.

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.494)

• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.496)

• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS 9) (→P.499)



Using Favorites

You can register print settings as “favorites” to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

Favorites

Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you can check the settings details.

Note

• You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the same conditions on another computer. (In Windows and Mac OS 9.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.513)

• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.571)

• Using Favorites (Mac OS 9) (→P.595)

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing

Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.

Note

• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)


Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.489)

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.490)

• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.492)



Printing from Photoshop

You can print images in the Adobe RGB color space that you have created in Photoshop, the Adobe Systems photo retouching application. Using the dedicated Photoshop printer driver plug-in (provided with the printer) makes it easy to print Adobe RGB images more attractively.

• Using the Plug-in to Print (→P.487)

• Using the Printer Driver to Print (→P.487)

Using the Plug-in to Print

The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop is a dedicated plug-in provided with the printer that you can load in Photoshop and customize for your printing needs. By using the plug-in, you can print while preserving the 16-bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image. Some of the settings and customizations available in the plug-in are as follows.

• Automatic detection of the color space (sRGB or Adobe RGB) for automatic selection of the optimal prole. This feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images.

• Advanced gray adjustment, including adjustment of tone curves, in addition to an array of standard adjustments for color balance, brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow.

• Fine-tune color tones in Photoshop while viewing a preview that accurately reproduces printing results.

• With print log management, you can save and load setting parameters from past print jobs.

Note

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop for Windows and Macintosh are provided with the printer.

For instructions and details on which versions of Photoshop are compatible with the imagePROGRAF Print

Plug-In for Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Windows)

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Macintosh)

Using the Printer Driver to Print

The printer driver offers the following settings and adjustments.

• Choose the standard sRBG color space or Adobe RGB as desired.

• Adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray levels.

For instructions on using the printer driver to print Adobe RGB images created in Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) (→P.530)

• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) (→P.572)

• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.597)



Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.

Important

• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

Edit Using PosterArtist

PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and compose an original with them.

Important


For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:

• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.528)



Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.

Note

• Auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function after it is disabled, or to change the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click N Auto Cut to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

6.

To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

7.

Click OK to close the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

8.


Note


Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.



Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)


Note

• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a cut guideline instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


9.


10.

Click C Set to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

11.

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

Important

• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12.

Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

13.


Note




Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9)


Note

• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a cut guideline instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Make sure Roll Paper is selected in A Media Source.



8.


9.


10.

Click D Set to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

11.

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

Important

• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12.

Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

13.


Note





Orientation (Windows)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

• Document: An original in landscape orientation


• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.




7.


8.

In H Orientation, click J Landscape.

9.


10.


(420.0mm).

11.


Note





Orientation (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.

In the C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.

In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

5.


6.


7.


8.


9.




10.


11.


12.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




13.



14.


Note





Orientation (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.

In B Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

5.


6.


7.


8.


9.




10.


11.


12.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note


13.


Note




Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on

(Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on the following example.


• Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Target list.

Note




6.


7.

In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

8.


9.


(420.0mm).

10.


11.

Select the D Watermark check box.

12.

Click FILE COPY in the E Watermarks list.

Note

• To create your own, original watermark, click F Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.

13.


Note




Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on

(Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on the following example.


• Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

• Paper: Roll



1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.




8.


Target list.

Note

• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set..

9.


10.


11.


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note




12.

Select the C Watermark check box.

13.

Click FILE COPY in the D Watermarks list.

Note

• To create your own, original watermark, click E Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.

14.



15.


Note



Windows

Software

Windows

Printer Driver Settings (Windows)

For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.538)

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.206)

For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

• Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.208)

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.556)

• Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.542)

• Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.548)

• Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) (→P.523)

• Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.519)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.

• Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.552)

• Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.521)

You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.

• Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.555)

506 Software

Windows

• Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.524)

Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved in a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.

• Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.525)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

• Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.526)

You can view support information and the user’s manual.

• Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.527)

You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout Guide .

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

Software 507

Windows

Conrming Print Settings (Windows)

There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.

• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.508)

• Checking a print preview (→P.509)

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, layout, and so on.

Display Area

Top illustrations

Middle, bordered area

Bottom illustrations

Information Displayed

Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are displayed.

Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

508 Software

Note

• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box.

Windows

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

When you activate this feature, PageComposer is launched before printing. Conrming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)”. (→P.510)

Software 509

Windows

Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5.

When you attempt to print, the PageComposer window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

6.

In the PageComposer editing window, select the document to print and open the Print Preview window.

7.

After conrming that the layout is just as you expected, close the Print Preview window.

8.

In the PageComposer editing window, make sure the document to print is selected. Choose

Print from the File menu.

510 Software

Windows

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

Note

• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click Get Information by Media Type.


A Media Source Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the Media Source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Media Source option and click OK .

Software 511

Windows

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)

The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.

A Copy

Button Corresponding Utility

Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a le created with a text editor or similar application.

512 Software

Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

Windows

5.

Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6.

Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.

• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

7.

Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.

Note

• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.

Software 513

Windows

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


3.

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

4.

In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.

5.

Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.


Note


514 Software

Main Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Conguration using Easy Settings

Windows

Setting Item

A Media Type

Description

Select the paper type.



B Get Information Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source, media type, and roll width.

C Preferences Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.

E Print Target Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)

Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)

Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

F View Settings Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target .

L Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.

Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.550)

Software 515

Windows

Setting Item

M Status Monitor

N

S

About

Defaults

Description

Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

516 Software

Conguration using Advanced Settings

Windows

Setting Item

A Media Type

E

B

C

Get Information

Preferences

Print Priority

Description




Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source, media type, and roll width.

Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.


Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

(→P.243)

F

G

Print Quality

Color Mode

Choose the level of print quality.


(→P.243)

Choose the color mode.


(→P.243)

The available Color Mode options vary depending on the Media Type setting.

H Color Settings Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.254)

I Thicken Fine Lines

J Unidirectional Printing

Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.

Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

K High-Precision Printing Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this will take more time than regular printing.

L Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.

Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.550)

Software 517

Windows

Setting Item

M Status Monitor

N

S

About

Defaults

Description

Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.


518 Software

Page Setup Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Page Setupsheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Windows

Setting Item

A Page Size

B Borderless Printing

Description

Select the page size as specied in the source application.

For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)

Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the L Media

Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.365)

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.367)

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.348)

D Fit Media Size

E Scale to t Roll Paper

Width

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Print Image with Actual

Size

Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available, when you have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either length or width of the document from the A Page Size list.

G Media Size

Available when Fit Media

Size is selected.

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)

Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

C Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.313)

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.314)

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.315)

D Fit Media Size Scales the document image to match the paper size.

E Fit Roll Paper Width Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Scaling Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

G Media Size Choose the size of the paper you will print on.


Software 519

Windows

Setting Item

H Orientation

K Rotate Page 90 degrees

(Conserve Paper)

L Media Source

M

N

Roll Paper Width

Auto Cut

Description

Choose the printing orientation.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P.485)

Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.460)

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media

Type in the Main sheet.

Choose the roll width.

For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)

You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. Click to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

O

S

Size Options

Defaults

Under A Automatic Cutting , you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut

Guideline .

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.486)

Click to display the Media Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

520 Software

Layout Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Windows

Setting Item

A Page Layout

Description

Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.420)

Printing Posters in Sections (→P.421)

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.417)

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.488)

D

C Set

Watermark

Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in

A Page Layout . In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.

• Page Layout Printing

• Pages to Print

• Free Layout Settings

Activating this option makes two settings available, E Watermarks and F

Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks (→P.484)

E Watermarks Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

F Edit Watermark Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

G Print Centered Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.443)

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.444)

H Rotate 180 degrees

I No Spaces at Top or

Bottom (Conserve Paper)

Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

(→P.461)

J Copies Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”

Software 521

Windows

Setting Item

M Special Settings

S Defaults

Description

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.


522 Software

Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment sheet.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment sheet, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Windows

Note

• To display the Gray Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), select Monochrome

(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.



A Sample The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B Sample List Select a sample image, as desired.

C Color Balance

D X

E Y

Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.

Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.

You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.

Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.

You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or enter the values directly.

F Brightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image

(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

G Contrast

H

I

Highlight

Shadow

K Defaults

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.

Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.


Software 523

Windows

Favorites Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Favoritessheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A Favorites

B Settings Details

C Comment

Description

Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.

Using Favorites (→P.486)

Displays details of the favorite selected in the

Displays notes registered in the favorite.

A Favorites .

D

E Application Settings Priority Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A

Favorites , when clicking D Apply Favorite . For details on the settings items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.

F

Apply Favorite

Delete

G Edit

Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the A Favorites .

Click to delete the selected favorite settings from the A Favorites .

Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite settings selected in the Favorites .

H Add Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

I Import

J Export

524 Software

Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a le.

Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a le.

Utility Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Utilitysheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

Windows

A

B

Maintenance

Button

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Corresponding Utility

Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check

• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

• Head alignment adjustment

• Feed amount adjustment

Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a

Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.317)

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

Software 525

Windows

Support Sheet (Windows)

On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

A Support Information

Button

B User Manual

C Settings Summaries


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the

Main , Page Setup , Layout , and Favorites sheets.

526 Software

Device Settings Sheet (Windows)

Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the

Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.

The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

Windows

A About


You can display version information for the printer driver.

Software 527

Windows

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)

This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout for printing.

Important

• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

1.


2.


3.


4.


528 Software

Windows

5.


6.

Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the B Page Layout list.

7.

When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.

9.

Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.

Important

• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

10.

Print from the PosterArtist menu.

Software 529

Windows

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.

• Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop

• Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

• Paper: Roll


• Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Important

• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.

• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.

1.

In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.

Note

• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.

• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.

2.

Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.

3.

Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.

4.

In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.

5.

Click Print to display the Print dialog box.

6.

Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.

7.


530 Software

8.


Photo Paper.

9.


Windows

10.

Click Image in the E Print Priority list.

11.

Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.

Note


12.


13.


14.

Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.

15.

In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.

16.

In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.

17.


18.


Software 531

Windows

19.



20.


21.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll

(254.0mm), and then click OK.

22.


Note


532 Software

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and

“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.

Windows

• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.

• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

• Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low.

• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has run out.

• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal printing results.

• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

Note

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Software 533

Windows

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.

• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.

• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your computer and these printers is possible.

Note

• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.

534 Software

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

Windows

Software 535

Windows

Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility

From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator” account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.

• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility”. (→P.535)

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2.

In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.

3.

Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4.

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

5.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

6.

Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.

7.

Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

536 Software

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image

les on your computer with various other applications.

Windows

• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.

• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.

• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment.

• Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it can save time and work in retouching.

Note

• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.

Software 537

Windows

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Windows)

1.

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences.

■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software



538 Software

Note

• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

Windows

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. The changes will not be valid after you exit the application.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.206)

Software 539

Windows

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows)

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

3.

Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

540 Software



Windows

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.538)

Software 541

Windows

Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows)

In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.

However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

Color Adjustment : color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A Preview The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B Original The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

G

H

Contrast

Saturation

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).


Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

I Gray Tone Adjustment Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.

542 Software

Setting Item

J Object Adjustment

S Defaults

Description

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.


Windows

Note

• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)

Object Adjustment dialog box

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.


A Image Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

Software 543

Windows

Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the Matching Mode list.

Note

• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.


A Matching Mode Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on

ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode , Driver ICM Mode , or Host ICM

Mode , depending on your color matching system. If you don’t want color matching using the printer driver, select Off .

B Matching Method Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.

Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching .

C Color Space Select the applicable color space as desired.

Note


544 Software

Windows

Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, and Host

ICM Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver

ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode on the Matching Mode sheet.

Note

• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.



B Input Prole Settings You can select Image , Graphics , or Text . You can choose Matching

Method and Input Prole .

Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .

To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text , select

Use the Same Prole for All Objects . To apply separate input proles to Graphics and Text , clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and specify the individual settings.

C Printer Prole Settings Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings .

Note


Software 545

Windows

Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos)

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Ambient Light Matching

Mode (Kyuanos) in the Matching Mode list.

When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method

When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method

Setting Item

A Matching Mode

B Matching Method

C Setting Method

D Print Chart

546 Software

Description

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Here, select Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) .

Select the matching method.

You can choose conguration based on printed Charts or based on using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Click to start the Light Source Check Tool , for printing Charts . The

Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function.

Setting Item

E Chart Number

F Lighting Source Type

G Color Temperature

Description

In Chart , select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.

Select the light source measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Select the value measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Light Source Check Tool

The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.

Windows

Setting Item

A Printer

B Media Type

C Media Source

D Print

Description

The printer name is displayed here.

Select the type of paper, as desired. For information on the types of paper compatible with Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) , refer to the

Paper Reference Guide . (→P.169)

Choose the media source, as desired.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type in the Main sheet.

Click to print the Chart .

Software 547

Windows

Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings sheet for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment : monochrome

On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A Preview The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.


C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Not available.

G Contrast



Not available.

H Saturation

I Gray Tone Adjustment


Not available.


S Defaults Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

548 Software

Windows

Note




Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.





Software 549

Windows

Conrming the Print Image Before Printing

The preview screen displayed before printing enables you to see the original image just as it will be printed.

Conrming the image of print jobs helps prevent printing errors.

For instructions on previewing print jobs, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows) (→P.510)

• Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.562)

• Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.586)

550 Software

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)


Windows

Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click








(→P.198)




Safety




G Cut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H Calibration Value You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.


Software 551

Windows

Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)

In the Media Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Media Size. The sizes you dene are listed with standard media sizes for selection later as needed.

Note

• To display the Media Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.519), click

Media Size Options.


A Media Size List Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

B Delete Custom media sizes created by users can be deleted from the Media Size

List , as needed.

However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.

• If a standard media size of the printer driver is selected.

• If an oversized media size is selected.

• If a media size in a red box is selected.

C Custom Media Size Name You can name Custom Media Size as desired.

D Units Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Media Size height and width.

E Media Size Specify the desired Width and Height . You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting

Borderless Printing Size . To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width

to Height .

F Add Enables you to register the custom media size you have specied or overwrite an existing custom media size.

G Display Series You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size , Media Size , and Media Size List .

552 Software

Windows

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.



1.

Register a hot folder on your computer


2.







1.


2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3.

Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.

Software 553

Windows



Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note


Copy Guide .

554 Software

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special

Settings dialog box.

Windows

Note

• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.521), click Special

Settings.


A FineZoom Settings This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto . If documents are not printed correctly on large-format media, it may help to select Yes , and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed, it may help to select No .

B Fast Graphic Process If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

C Application Color

Matching Priority

You can give applications priority in color management.

Software 555

Windows

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Windows)

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.515), click View Settings by Print Target.


A Print Target Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C Details Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target .

556 Software

Mac OS X

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.577)

Mac OS X

For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

• Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.209)

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.582)

• Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P.578)

• Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.580)

• Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.569)

• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.566)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.

• Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.568)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.570)

You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.

• Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.571)

You can view support information and the user’s manual.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a single page before printing. For details, see the Free Layout Guide .

With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see the imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .

With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

Software 557

Mac OS X

Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.

• Check a preview of the settings (→P.558)


Check a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional

Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.

Pane displayed when the Images tab is clicked

Display Area Information Displayed

On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Pane displayed when the Size tab is clicked

Paper size details are indicated numerically.

Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

558 Software

Mac OS X

Note

• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.



Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)”. (→P.562)

Software 559

Mac OS X

Checking the Layout Before Printing

You can check the print layout on the preview screen. While viewing this screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

Preview (Macintosh)

Important

• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:

• Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.561)

560 Software

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.

Mac OS X

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

4.

Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .

Software 561

Mac OS X

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)


1.


2.

Click Preview to open the preview window.

3.

Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print to start printing.

Note

• “Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

562 Software

Mac OS X

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver media type setting.

Note

• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click Get Information by Media Type.


A Media Source Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select the desired Media Source option and click OK .

Software 563

Mac OS X

Main Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.


A Media Type

E

L

B Get Information

C

Setting Item

Set

Print Target

F View set.

Printer Information

Description




Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.



Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)


Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target .

Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

564 Software


Mac OS X

Setting Item

A Media Type

Description




B Get Information Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

C Set Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.

E Print Priority Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.


(→P.243)

F Print Quality Choose the level of print quality.


(→P.243)

H Color Mode Choose the color mode.


(→P.243)

I Set Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.


J Unidirectional Printing Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

K High-Precision Printing Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this will take more time than regular printing.

L Printer Information Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

Software 565

Mac OS X

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A Media Source

Description

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media

Type in the Main pane.

B Roll Paper Width Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

C Page Size Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the application.

For details on page sizes available in the application.see “Paper Sizes”.

(→P.175)

D Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.




E Fit Media Size Resizes the document image to match the paper size.

F Fit Roll Paper Width Resizes the document image to match the roll width.

G Scaling Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

H Borderless Printing Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the

Source list.

A Media

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.




I Media Size Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

Click Display all selections for Media Size to list available sizes.


566 Software

Mac OS X

Setting Item

J Print Centered

Description

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.



K No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom

Margins (→P.461)

L Rotate Page 90 degrees Activate this setting to rotate the original 90 degrees before printing.


Software 567

Mac OS X

Utility Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Utilitypane.

A

B

C

Set

View

Set


Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.




Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , which enables you to view the status of print jobs.

Click to complete the settings for Auto Arrange or Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy).

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

568 Software

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Mac OS X

Note

• To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), select Monochrome






C Color Balance

D X

E Y








G Contrast

H Highlight

I Shadow




Software 569

Mac OS X

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.

Setting Item

A Data Send Method

Description

Choose how print data is sent to the printer.

•

•

B

C

Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer

D Send job to Click to display the Send job to dialog box, which enables you to specify how print jobs are stored on the printer’s hard disk.

•

•

•

E

F

G

Print

Print (auto delete)

Save in mail box

H Save data before printing Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk.

570 Software

Support Pane (Mac OS X)

On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

Mac OS X

A Support Information

Button

B User Manual

C Settings

D About


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box, which enables you to specify where to save the le.

You can display version information for the printer driver.

Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

Software 571

Mac OS X

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)




• Paper: Roll


• Roll Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Important

• Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.

• In the printer driver, specify Driver Correction and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.

1.


Note

• Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.


2.

Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.

3.

Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.

4.

In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.

5.

Click Print.

6.


7.


Photo Paper.

572 Software

8.


Mac OS X

9.

Click Image in the E Print Priority list.

10.

Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.

Note


11.


12.


13.

Click Matching to display the Matching pane.

14.

In Mode, click Driver Correction.

15.


16.


17.


Software 573

Mac OS X

18.


19.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,

10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

Note


20.

Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in C Page Size -in this case,

10"x12".

21.


Note


574 Software

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Mac OS X


• You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.



Software 575

Mac OS X

Note

• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.

After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.

4.

Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the

Search button.

Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

5.



576 Software

Mac OS X


Applications (Mac OS X)

1.


Note


2.


3.



Software 577

Mac OS X

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)



Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A Preview The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.


C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness



G Contrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

H Saturation Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

I Gray Adjustment Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.

578 Software

Mac OS X

Note


Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

• To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.



B Matching Method Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various

Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in

Matching .


Note


Software 579

Mac OS X

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click Color Settings in Advanced Settings.




C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Not available.



H Saturation

I Gray Adjustment

Not available.

Not available.

Note


580 Software

Mac OS X

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)


Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click








(→P.198)


D Between Scans

E

G

H

I

Roll Paper Margin for

Safety


Cut Speed


Calibration Value

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.



Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .

You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

J Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

Software 581

Mac OS X


(Mac OS X)


Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.564), click View Settings by Print Target.



B Name

C Details

Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

582 Software

Mac OS 9

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS 9 printer driver, refer to the following topics.

• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS 9) (→P.602)

Mac OS 9

For information on the Mac OS 9 printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587)

You can specify the number of copies, page range, media type, color processing, print quality, and print preview. Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or

Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

• Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.210)

• View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS 9) (→P.611)

• Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) (→P.604)

• Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.607)

• Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.592)

• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.589)

You can specify the amount of enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, media size, and page layout.

• Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.591)

You can specify the media source, watermarks, and orientation.

• Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.593)

You can perform maintenance for the Printhead or feed amount.

• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.594)

You can specify settings for background printing, how print jobs are sent to the printer, and notication after printing.

• Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.610)

Software 583

Mac OS 9

Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)

There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.

• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.584)


Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Finishing, Utility, and

Additional Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.

Display Area

Pane displayed when the is clicked

H Images tab

Information Displayed

On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Paper size details are indicated numerically.

Pane displayed when the clicked

I Size tab is

Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

584 Software

Mac OS 9

Note

• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click G View set. on the Main pane to display the View set. dialog box.



Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.586)

Software 585

Mac OS 9

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)


1.


2.

Click Preview to open the preview window.

3.

Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print this page to start printing.

Note

• “Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

586 Software

Main Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS 9

Note

• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.


Setting Item

A Copies

B Page

C Media Type

D Set

F Print Target

L

G View set.

Printer

Description

Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”

Specify the pages to print.

• All Pages

• From and To






Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)


Click to display the View set. dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the order of items listed in F Print Target .

F Print Target list or change the

Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

Software 587

Mac OS 9


Setting Item

A Copies

B

C

F

G

H

K

L

Page

Media Type

D Set

Print Priority

Print Quality

Color Mode

I

Thicken Fine Lines

Printer

Set

J Unidirectional Printing

Description

Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”

Specify the pages to print.

• All Pages

• From and To







(→P.243)

Choose the level of print quality.


(→P.243)

Choose the color mode.


(→P.243)

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.


Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

Depending on the printing conditions, unidirectional printing may be the default setting even if you do not choose it. In this case, the printing speed will not change if you activate the setting.

Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.

Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

588 Software

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS 9

Setting Item

A Roll Paper Width

B Page Size

Description

Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.

Displays the page size, as specied in the source application.

For details on paper sizes available from the source application, see

“Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)

C Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.




D Fit Media Size Scales the document image to match the paper size.

E Fit Roll Paper Width Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Scaling Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

G Borderless Printing Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected from the A

Media Source list in the Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.591).

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.




H Media Size Choose the size of the paper you will print on.


I Page Layout Activate this option to select the page layout when printing multiple pages per sheet.(*1)

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.420)

Printing Posters in Sections (→P.421)

Software 589

Mac OS 9

Setting Item

J Layout Direction

K Page Border

Description

This setting is available when I Page Layout is selected. Here, you can specify the orientation of multiple pages to be printed on a single sheet.

This setting is available when I Page Layout is selected. Here, you can specify the type of boundary line around each page of multiple pages printed on a single sheet.

*1: Selecting poster layout from the I Page Layout list displays a check box for specifying the pages to print.

590 Software

Mac OS 9

Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Finishing pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A Media Source

Description

You can choose the media source.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in C Media

Type in the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587).

B

C

Roll Paper Width

Watermark

Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

Activating this option makes two settings available,

E Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks (→P.484)

D Watermarks and

D Watermarks

E Edit Watermark

Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

F Print Centered Choose this option to print the document images in the center of the paper.



G Rotate 180 degrees

H No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom

Margins (→P.461)

I Rotate Page 90 degrees




Software 591

Mac OS 9

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Note

• To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), select Monochrome






C Color Balance

D X

E Y








G Contrast

H

I

Highlight

Shadow




592 Software

Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Device Settings pane.

Mac OS 9

A Utility


Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.




Software 593

Mac OS 9

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A Background Printing

D

G Printing Finished Alert Method

H Make a Sound

J Display a Message

K Send job to

Q

Data Send Method

Special Settings

Description

Choose the printing method.

Activate this setting by clicking B On to print in the background.

Deactivate this setting by clicking C Off to print in the foreground.

Choose how print data is sent to the printer.

• E Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

• F Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer

Choose how to be notied when printing is nished.

Specify how to be notied when printing is nished, by a tone or a message.

Activate this setting to be notied by a tone when printing is

nished. You can also choose a different tone.

Activate this setting to be notied by a dailog box when printing is nished.

You can choose the output method of print jobs.

•

•

•

L

M

O

Print

Print (auto delete)

Save in mail box

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.

594 Software

Using Favorites (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.

In the Favorites list, click Add Favorite to display the Add Favorite dialog box.

5.

Complete the following settings in the Add Favorite dialog box.

• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added.

6.

Click OK to close the Add Favorite dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in Favorites.

Note

• To edit the name of an existing favorite or comment, click Edit Favorite in the Favorites list to display the Edit Favorite dialog box.

• To save a favorite as a le, click Export and specify the le to save.

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


Mac OS 9

3.


4.


5.


6.

In the Favorites list, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

• To import a favorite, click Import and specify the favorite le.

• If you select a favorite and edit it, an icon is displayed at left of the name to indicate that the settings have been changed. For details, refer to the printer driver help.

Software 595

Mac OS 9

7.

Conrm the print settings, and then click Print to start printing.

Note


596 Software

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9)




• Paper: Roll



Important

• Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.

• In the printer driver, specify Driver Matching Mode and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.

1.


Note

• Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.


2.

In the Photoshop menu, choose Print.

3.


Mac OS 9

4.


Photo Paper.

Software 597

Mac OS 9

5.


6.

Click Image in the F Print Priority list.

7.

Select the print quality in the G Print Quality list.

Note

• Options displayed in the G Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

8.


9.


10.

Click Matching to display the Matching pane.

11.

In Mode, click Driver Correction.

12.


13.


14.


598 Software

15.

Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in B Page Size -in this case,

10"x12".

16.


Mac OS 9

17.


18.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,

10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

Note

• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in the B Roll Paper Width list, click the L

Printer in the Main pane to update the printer information.

19.


Note


Software 599

Mac OS 9

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.


• You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.



600 Software

Mac OS 9

Note

• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.



3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.

4.

Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the

Search button.

Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

5.



Software 601

Mac OS 9


Applications (Mac OS 9)

1.


Note


2.


602 Software

Mac OS 9

3.



Software 603

Mac OS 9

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9)



Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.




C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness



G Contrast

H Saturation


Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

604 Software

Setting Item

I Gray Tone


Mac OS 9

Description

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.


Note




Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment pane.





Software 605

Mac OS 9

Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

• To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.



B Matching Method Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various

Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in

Matching .


Note


606 Software

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Mac OS 9

Note

• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A Preview The image above is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the right of this pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B Original The image on the bottom shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C Cyan

D Magenta

E Yellow

F Brightness

Not available.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the monitor).


H Saturation

I Gray Tone


Not available.

Not available.


Software 607

Mac OS 9

Note




Note

• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, on the Color Adjustment pane, click Object Adjustment.





608 Software

Mac OS 9

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)


Note

• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click








(→P.198)




Safety




G Cut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H Automatic Cutting You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .


Software 609

Mac OS 9

Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special

Settings dialog box.

Note

• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.594), click Special Settings.


A Fast Graphic Process If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

610 Software


(Mac OS 9)


Mac OS 9

Note

• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.587), click View Settings by Print Target.



B Name

C Details

Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

Software 611

Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Environment

System requirements

The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.

• Printing over a TCP/IP network

• Compatible operating systems


• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

• Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)

• Mac OS 9.1 or later

• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later

• Compatible computer

• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

• Printing over an AppleTalk network

• Compatible operating systems

• Mac OS 9.1 or later

• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later



Note

• The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.

• Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.

• Printing over a NetWare network

• Compatible servers

• Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0

• Compatible clients


• Windows XP (Professional)



Note

• In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.

612 Network Setting

Network Setting

Network environment

After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers as needed.

• Example of a Windows network

In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.

Note

• NetBIOS is not supported.

• Example of a Macintosh network

In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour(Zeroconf) functions.

• Example of a NetWare network

Note

• Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.

In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.

Network Setting 613

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address on the Printer

You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer on a TCP/IP network.

The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the Quick Start Guide.

Follow the steps below to congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.

• Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows) (→P.536)

• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.618)

• Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.619)

Note

• We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in other network except for TCP/IP. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.

For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.622)

614 Network Setting

Network Setting

Initializing the Network Settings

Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.

Important

• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

• For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.

(→P.614)

• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.622)

1.

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://“printer IP address or name”/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2.

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3.

If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4.

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5.

Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.

6.

After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Note

• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.

• If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN

MENU, and then press ▲, ▼, and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →

Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.

Network Setting 615

Network Setting

Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

Item Details

Activate this setting to use DHCP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use

BOOTP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use RARP for conguring the IP address.

Off

RAW Mode Bi-direction

Enable DNS Dynamic Update Activate this setting to perform

DNS server registration automatically.

Use Zeroconf Function


Raw mode bidirectional communication.

IP Address

Off

Off


Bonjour.

On

Specify the printer’s IP address.

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

LPD Printing

Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0

Specify the printer’s default gateway.

Activate this setting to use LDP

Printing.

0.0.0.0

On

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

Activate this setting to use IPP

Printing.

On

Specify the URI of the printer used for IPP printing using up to 252 characters (1-252 characters).

When using a standard Windows port for IPP printing, enter an

URL less than 255 bytes for all characters for “http://<IP address/IPP-URI.” printer

Default Setting

616 Network Setting

Network Setting

RAW Printing

Item Details

Activate this setting to use Raw

Printing.

SMTP Server Address Specify the SMTP server’s IP address.

Primary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

On

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Default Setting

Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

DNS Host Name Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1-63 characters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and “-”

(hyphens). Do not use numbers or “-” for the rst character or “-” for the last character.

DNS Domain Name

Multicast DNS Service Name

0.0.0.0

NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx

Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters, numbers, “-”

(hyphens), and “.” (periods). Do not use numbers, “-”, or “.” for the

rst character, or “-” or “.” for the last character.

(Blank)

Specify the printer’s Multicast

DNS service name, up to 63 characters. (1-63 characters)

This name will be displayed when

Bonjour functions are used.

Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)

7.

Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such protocol running in the network.

• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.

• It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use.

• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS

Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.

Network Setting 617

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel

This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.

6.

Press ◄ or ► to move to another digit for numerical input.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

8.

Repeat steps 6-7 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.

9.


If any of the settings are changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Important

• Be sure to complete step 6. This will activate the values you have entered.

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.

618 Network Setting

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands

This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.

To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel.

1.

Check the printer’s MAC address.

You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the ► button.

You can also print information on the printer status, which includes the MAC address, as follows:

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.

4.


The MAC address is indicated in the printer status information in the following location.

2.

In Windows, open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.

3.

Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.

arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]

Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx

Note

• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

00:00:85:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

Network Setting 619

Network Setting

4.

Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.

ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479

Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479

Note

• In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.

• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

Note

• The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0.”Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gateway to match your network settings.


620 Network Setting

Network Setting

Specifying Printer-Related Information

Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.

Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.

5.

To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.

6.

Refer to the tables of settings items for device information and security settings to complete the settings.

Device information settings items

Item

Device Name

Location

Administrator

Phone

Comments(E-mail)

Details

Specify the device name.

(0-32 characters)

Specify where the device is installed.

(0-32 characters)

Identify the administrator.

(0-32 characters)

Specify the device administrator’s contact information.

(0-32 characters)

Enter any notes from the device administrator.

(0-32 characters)

Default Setting

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

Security settings items

Item

Old Password

New Password

Conrm

Details

Enter the current device password.

(0-15 characters)

Enter a new password.

(0-15 characters)

Enter the new password again to conrm it.

(0-15 characters)

Default Setting

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as use of SNMP or IPP authentication, or an IP address to restrict printing via TCP/IP.

7.

Click OK to activate the settings.

Network Setting 621

Network Setting

Using RemoteUI

Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network settings.

For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.

• Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.616)

• Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.637)

• Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.624)

• Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.621)

Note

• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status information, and cancel print jobs.

• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. You can change the display language after logging on in Administrator Mode by choosing the desired language in the Language list.

Important

• Use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.

• Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)

• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.

• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly congured.

622 Network Setting

Network Setting

Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors

Occur

The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.

Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.

Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables.

Note

• For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Network Setting 623

Network Setting (Windows)

Network Setting (Windows)

Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

Item

Frame Type

NCP Burst Mode

Print Application

Packet Signature

Bindery

PServer

File Server Name

Print Server Name

Print Server Password

Polling Interval

Details

Specify the type of frame to use in NetWare.

Default Setting

Disabled


NCP Burst Mode.

This mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, leave the setting On.

On

NDS PServer Choose the print service.

• Bindery PServer

• RPrinter

• NDS PServer

• NPrinter

Select If Requested by Server to use packet signature.

If Requested by Server

Specify the name of a le server that has a NetWare print server, up to 47 characters.

-

Specify the name of a

NetWare print server, up to 47 characters.

-

Set a password for the print server, up to 20 characters.

Specify the interval to conrm jobs.

(1-15 seconds)

-

5

624 Network Setting

Item

RPrinter Print Server Name

NDS

PServer

Printer Number

Tree Name

Context Name

Print Server Name

Print Server Password

Polling Interval

NPrinter Print Server Name

Printer Number

7.


Details



Specify the number of the printer connected to the

NetWare print server.

(0-5)

Specify the name of an NDS tree that has a NetWare print server, up to 32 characters.

-

-

0

Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server, up to 255 characters.



Set a password for the print server, up to 20 characters.

-

-

-

Specify the interval to conrm jobs.

(1-255 seconds)



Enter the advertising name of the print server designated by the NetWare print service.

Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

-

Specify the number of the printer connected to the

NetWare print server.

(0-254)

Enter the printer number designated by the NetWare print service.

5

0


Default Setting

Network Setting 625


Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type

To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame type in your NetWare environment.

Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer Control Panel.

Note

• You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.

Important

• Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.



Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

2.


3.


4.

In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.

5.

Click ETHERNET II under Frame Type in TCP/IP.

6.

In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in

Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.

Important

• You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using

RemoteUI.

7.

Click Set.

8.


9.


626 Network Setting


Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.

5.


Return to the NetWare menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service, and then press the ► button.

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.


10.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Important


Network Setting 627


Specifying NetWare Print Services

Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues, and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.

• NWADMIN

• PCONSOLE

(from Novell, provided with NetWare)

Important

• If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client software) must be installed as the client software application.

• NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.

This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary depending on the environment.

Choosing the type of print services

Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions as needed.

Note

• In NetWare 5.1/6.0/6.5, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the

Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare documentation.

• NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery

NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.

• Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode

Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.

• Queue Server Mode

When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is required for each network interface.

• Remote Printer Mode

In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.

628 Network Setting


Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server

Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.

2.

Run Quick Setup.

1.

Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.

2.

Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right and choose the name from the list.

3.

Enter a desired printer name in Name.

4.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and

Connection Type to Manual Load.

5.

Enter a desired queue name in Name.

6.

In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.

7.

Complete other settings as needed and click OK.

Note

• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s network settings. Note the print server name for future reference.

• When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”

3.

Set a password.

1.

Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.

2.

Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.

3.

Click OK to close the password input dialog box.

4.

Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.

4.

To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.

To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le server and press the Enter key.

Note

• This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.

Network Setting 629


Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.

2.

Switch to bindery mode.

3.

If the print server has not been created, create it.

1.

In Available Options, select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.

2.

Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.

Note

• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Note down the print server name for future reference.

4.

Specify the printer type.

1.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.

2.

Press the Esc key.

3.

After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.

5.

Set a password.

1.

In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.

2.

Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.

3.

Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.

4.

Enter the password and press the Enter key.

6.

Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE is nished.

7.

Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.

630 Network Setting


Specifying NetWare Protocols

Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.

Note

• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.622)

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.

7.

To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.

Note

• Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.

8.

In Print Application, click the print service to be used.

Note

• Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at the same time.

9.

For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.

10.

Complete the following settings based on the selected service.

• If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In File Server Name, enter the le server name.

2.

In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.628)

3.

In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.628)

4.

In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

• If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying


2.

In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.628)

Network Setting 631


• If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)

1.

In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server. Do not exceed 255 characters for the context name.

2.

In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.628)

3.

In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying


4.

In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

• If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.628) Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

2.

In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.628)

11.


12.

Click Reset to activate the settings.

For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.

(→P.624)

Note

• If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown, and the User Name information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER.

632 Network Setting


Conguring NetWare Network Settings

To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.

Important


1.

Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.

For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.626)

2.

Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.628)

3.

Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.631)

After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the

NetWare network.

4.

Connect to the NetWare network.

Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and operating system documentation.

5.

Install the printer driver.

Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.

6.

Follow these steps to congure the printer port.

1.

Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.

3.

Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.

4.

As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service settings.

Note

• This step is not necessary if you specied the printer destination during installation of the printer driver.

Network Setting 633


Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

Important

• If you use the printer on a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

• Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.614)

1.

Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.

3.

Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.

4.

Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.

5.

In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.

6.

Click New Port.

After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP

Printer Port Wizard.

7.

Click Next.

8.

In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer’s IP address.

9.

Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.

10.

Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

11.

Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.

12.

Click OK to close the printer properties window.

Note

• The procedure described above is the conguration based on the LPR or RAW protocol using the standard TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).

634 Network Setting


Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

Network Setting 635


Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility

From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important




1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2.


3.


4.

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

5.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

6.


7.


Note

• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

636 Network Setting

Network Setting (Macintosh)

Network Setting (Macintosh)

Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk

Protocol Settings page.

6.

Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

Item

Phase Type

Details

Specify whether to use AppleTalk.

If you will use AppleTalk, choose Phase 2.

If you will not use AppleTalk, choose Disabled .

Name (*1) Specify the object name used by AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte or 15 double-byte characters).

However, do not use the following single-byte characters:

@ * : =

Zone (*2)

Default Setting

Disabled

Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)

Specify the printer zone name, up to 31 single-byte characters.

However, do not use the following single-byte characters:

@ : = Also avoid using “*” (which represents the default zone) in the middle of a string.

*

*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Chooser in Mac OS 9 or Printer Setup

Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer. By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).”

(Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.

Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7.


Network Setting 637


Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)

Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

• If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.639)

• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.643)

• If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.647)

638 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)

To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.

Activating AppleTalk on the printer

Important

• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk, and then press the ► button.

4.


5.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

• By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer zone name.


Important


Network Setting 639


Conguring the destination (Mac OS 9)

1.

Choose Chooser from the Apple menu to display the Chooser window.

2.

In AppleTalk, click Active.

3.

Close the Chooser window.

4.

Click AppleTalk under Control Panels to display the AppleTalk window.

5.

In Connect via, choose Built-in Ethernet.

6.

Close the AppleTalk window and save the settings.

7.


8.

In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.

9.

In the Destination list at right, select AppleTalk, and then select the printer in the list below.

10.

Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.

640 Network Setting


Conguring the destination (Mac OS X)

Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.

2.

In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active, and click Apply now.

3.

Close the Network window and save the settings.

4.

Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.

5.

Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.

6.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.

Network Setting 641


7.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.

642 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh)

Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Important

• If you use the printer on TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.618)

Conguring the Destination (Mac OS 9)

1.


2.

In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.

3.

Click Registering IP Address in the Destination list to display the IP Address Register/Edit dialog box.

Network Setting 643


4.

Enter the printer’s IP address in IP Address and click Add.

5.

Click OK to close the IP Address Register/Edit dialog box.

6.

In the Destination list, click the address you registered.

7.

Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.

644 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)

Note

• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer

Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

1.


2.


3.

Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.

4.

Click More Printers.

Network Setting 645


5.

In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF).

6.

Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add.

7.

Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.

646 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)

In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Note

• In Mac OS 9, if the computer’s TCP/IP settings have been congured, you can connect the printer to the network as easily as with the Bonjour function.

Select IP Print (Auto) from the Destination list in Chooser to specify the destination.

Important

• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Chooser in Mac

OS 9 or Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS

Service Name. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using

RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.622)

1.


2.


3.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.

Network Setting 647


4.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.

648 Network Setting

Adjusting the Printhead

Maintenance

Adjusting the Printhead

Correcting Print Misalignment

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the

Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically”. (→P.649)

For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.651)

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by printing and reading a test pattern.

There are two modes for automatic adjustment: Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Standard Adj. will x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj.

If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the

Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.651)

Follow these steps for standard automatic adjustment of the Printhead.

1.

When using sheets, have three unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready when Standard

Adj. is selected or 11 when Advanced Adj. is selected.

When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.

• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)

• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)

• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)

Note

• Use Standard Adj. if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between colors to appear as attractive as possible.

• Use Advanced Adj. to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using

Advanced Adj. for printing at a higher level of image quality.

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

• This function is not available for CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear

Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try another type of media or adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.651)

Maintenance 649


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.

6.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the Printhead alignment.

650 Maintenance


Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead

Alignment Automatically”. (→P.649)

Follow these steps for standard manual adjustment of the Printhead.

Note

• If Manual Head Adj is unusable although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Head

Adj. Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Auto Head Adj. once.

1.

When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4-sized or larger ready.





Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj, and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the ► button.

Maintenance 651


8.

Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment. After you determine the pattern with straight lines, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Note

• If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-14, D-16 to D-20, and D-22 to

D-24.

10.

Press ◄.

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the ► button.

12.


The printer goes online.

652 Maintenance


Adjusting the Printhead Height

If the printing rubs or the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the Printhead height may improve results.

If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.

Maintenance 653

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed. There are two modes for adjusting the amount paper is fed, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Use Advanced

Adj. if Standard Adj. does not eliminate streaks, or when using paper other than genuine Canon paper or paper for purposes other than checking output. When using highly transparent media not compatible with automatic adjustment, you must adjust the feed amount manually. For instructions on manual adjustment, see

“Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually”. (→P.657)

Note

• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.661)

• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.

Important

• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.243)

Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.

654 Maintenance


Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount automatically.

1.

Prepare one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj. is selected or two when Advanced Adj. is selected.





Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.

6.


A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount and returns to online mode.

Note

• In some cases, the feed amount cannot be adjusted automatically. If so, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Band Adj. (→P.49)

• If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.656)

Maintenance 655


Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 50 mm (2.0 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.

Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

• The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.

Press the Online button to resume printing.

Note

• The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust the feed amount (manually or automatically), the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.

656 Maintenance


Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

This topic describes how to adjust the feed amount manually.

When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, adjust the feed amount manually. We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of media. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically”. (→P.654)

Note

• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.661)

Important


• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.243)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.

Maintenance 657


Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount manually.

1.

When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready.





Note

• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj, and then press the ► button.

5.


Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.

6.

Examine test pattern A for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.

Note

• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

7.

Examine test pattern B for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

The feed amount is adjusted, and the printer goes online.

If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.659)

658 Maintenance


Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 50 mm (2.0 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to printing in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.

Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

• The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.


Note

• The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust the paper feed amount (automatically or manually), the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.

Maintenance 659


Adjusting the Vacuum Strength

When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if the printing rubs or the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, results may be improved by adjusting the strength of vacuum against paper on the Platen.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the

OK button.

660 Maintenance


Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy

To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount.

Note

• If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

(→P.657)

Important


• To apply the results of adjusting the measurement scale for better accuracy in printing, you must rst set

Feed Priority to Print Length. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Line Drawing/Text. (→P.243)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Length or Automatic, and then press the OK button.

Maintenance 661


Follow these steps to adjust the scale for better accuracy.

1.

When using sheets, load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger.





Note

• When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. When the paper type is not specied, the printing quality may be affected without the correct adjustment of the feeding.

• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.

The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.

6.

Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.

You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value and ▼ to decrease it.

If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed longer, set the value toward the negative side.

Note

• You can also specify the adjustment value by selecting Paper Details → Adjust. Setting.

662 Maintenance

Color adjustment

Color adjustment

Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors

Color calibration is a feature that compensates for changes in color from individual variation among Printhead or from the printing environment, ensuring better color consistency.

We recommend using color calibration in the following situations.

• After initial installation

• After Printhead replacement

• If colors seem different from before (however, make sure you are printing under the same conditions and in the same printing environment)

• When consistent color is desired from multiple printers (in this case, also use the same version of

rmware and printer driver and the same settings.)

When you execute color calibration, a test pattern is printed and an adjustment value is automatically set based on the results of printing.

Important

• Before executing color calibration, you must prepare one of the following types of paper. Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. Use the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper to be used. For details on recommended environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)

Paper Compatible With

Color Calibration

Japan Europe Americas

HW Coated Compatible Compatible Compatible

Premium MatteP

Glossy Photo

FineArt Photo

FneArt HW Photo

HW GlossyPhoto2

HW SemiGlPhoto2

Poster Semi-Gl

SatinPhoto 190

Proong Paper

GlossyPhoto 190

GlossyPhoto 240

SatinPhoto 240

Comm Proong

RC Proong 210

Art Extr Smooth

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

-

-

-

-

-

-

Compatible

-

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

-

Compatible

Maintenance 663

Color adjustment

• Optimal adjustment values from color calibration are also applied for paper other than the type you use to execute color calibration when printing on that other type of paper.

• In the printer driver or in the MAIN MENU of the Control Panel, you can specify whether to apply the adjustment value from color calibration when printing. The printer driver settings are given priority.

For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

For information on printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

• Printer Driver Settings (Windows) (→P.506)

• Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) (→P.557)

• Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9) (→P.583)

• Before color calibration, ensure the printer is not exposed to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light.

• If you reinstall the printer driver and change the region selection of the Media Conguration Tool, region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration. See the Media

Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh)

• Default settings will be restored if you select MAIN MENU > System Setup > Reset PaprSetngs > Yes.

Because information added or updated using the Media Conguration Tool is also deleted, if paper of which information was added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration and is now deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again using a paper included originally in the default settings that is compatible with color calibration. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Note

• We recommend using only one type of paper for color calibration. Using the same type of paper for color calibration can improve color consistency.

• For better color consistency, we recommend performing color calibration under the same conditions of temperature and humidity each time.

• For further adjustment of the color of documents as printed applying color calibration, adjust the color in the printer driver. (→P.254)

• You can check when color calibration was executed and what paper was used from Status Print, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows) or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (on a Macintosh computer) in the MAIN MENU on the Control Panel.

For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

For details on imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

For details on imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.

664 Maintenance

Color adjustment

Follow these steps to execute color calibration.

1.

Load paper compatible with color calibration.

When using sheets, load paper A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.5×11 in) vertical, or larger. One sheet is required.


• Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.142)

• Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.146)

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Calibration, and then press ►.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Adjust, and then press the ► button.

6.


After the printer measures environmental conditions and checks the paper, a test pattern for color calibration is printed. An adjustment value based on the results of printing is set automatically.

After adjustment is complete, the printer goes online or ofine automatically.

Maintenance 665

Color adjustment

Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment

You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.

There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.


On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important




For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:

• By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.667)



Important




Tool.


For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:

• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.671)

666 Maintenance

Color adjustment


(Windows)

Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important



1.


2.


3.


4.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo

Paper).

Important

• Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)

Maintenance 667

Color adjustment

5.


6.

In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.

Important

• Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.

7.


8.


9.


10.

Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the A Matching Mode list.

668 Maintenance

11.

Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in C Setting Method.

If it is not selected already, select it.

12.

Click D Print Chart.

Light Source Check Tool now starts up.

Color adjustment

13.

Check the settings and click Print.

The Chart is printed.

14.

In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all four vertical images have the best overall color tone.

Note

• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of the strawberries look the most natural overall.

Maintenance 669

Color adjustment

15.

After conrming that Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching

Mode, select the number for the desired color tone on the chart in E Chart Number.

16.

Click OK.

17.


670 Maintenance

Color adjustment



Important




Tool.

1.

Using the Eye-One spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the

Lighting Source Type and Color Temperature in the viewing environment.

Note

• For detailed instructions on Eye-One and the Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo

Paper).

Important

• Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)

Maintenance 671

Color adjustment

6.


7.

In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.

Important

• Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.

8.


9.


10.


11.

Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the A Matching Mode list.

672 Maintenance

12.

Select By entering values directly in C Setting Method.

Color adjustment

13.

Select the F Lighting Source Type and G Color Temperature determined in step 1.

14.

Click OK.

15.


Maintenance 673

Color adjustment


Applications (Windows)

1.

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences.

■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software



Note

• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

674 Maintenance

Color adjustment

Important

• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. The changes will not be valid after you exit the application.

• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.206)

Maintenance 675

Ink Tanks

Ink Tanks

Ink Tanks

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “F” in a black circle on the side.

When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “F” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank part numbers.

• 330 ml (11.2  oz)

• MBK Ink Tank PFI-301MBK

• BK Ink Tank PFI-301BK

• C Ink Tank PFI-301C

• M Ink Tank PFI-301M

• Y Ink Tank PFI-301Y

• PC Ink Tank PFI-301PC

• PM Ink Tank PFI-301PM

• GY Ink Tank PFI-301GY

• 700 ml (23.7  oz)

• MBK Ink Tank PFI-701MBK

• BK Ink Tank PFI-701BK

• C Ink Tank PFI-701C

• M Ink Tank PFI-701M

• Y Ink Tank PFI-701Y

• PC Ink Tank PFI-701PC

• PM Ink Tank PFI-701PM

• GY Ink Tank PFI-701GY

Note

• For instructions on replacing Ink Tank, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.677)

676 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

Replacing Ink Tanks

Compatible Ink Tank

The printer supports both 330 ml (11.2  oz) and 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tanks as replacement tanks.

An Ink Tank for this printer is labeled with a white letter “F” in a black circle on the side. Request an Ink Tank with the same label when you purchase a new Ink Tank. For more information, see “Ink Tanks”. (→P.676)

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank

Take the following precautions when handling an Ink Tank.

Caution

• For safety, keep an Ink Tank out of the reach of children.

• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

Important

• Before removing an Ink Tank from the pouch for installation, shake it gently seven or eight times. If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• There may be ink around the ink holes of Ink Tank you remove. Handle an Ink Tank carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.

Using an old Ink Tank may affect the printing quality.

• Do not remove the Ink Tank if the printer is not used for a long period (a month or more). Ink remaining in the printer may become clogged and cause of printing problems.

• Coverage may be uneven if you replace the ink during a print job.

How to Replace the Ink Tank

1.

Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.678)

2.

Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.678) (Otherwise, open the Ink Tank Cover.)

3.

Remove the Ink Tank.

• 330 ml (11.2  oz) Ink Tank (→P.679)

• 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank (→P.681)

4.

Load the new Ink Tank.

• 330 ml (11.2  oz) Ink Tank (→P.683)

• 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank (→P.686)

Maintenance 677

Ink Tanks

Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement

You can replace Ink Tank if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine, or if messages advise you to check the amount of ink left or replace the Ink Tank.

If a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank, press the OK button.

Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead cleaning.

Note

• Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being fed.

Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement

Note

• This step is not necessary if a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank. Check the message on the

Display Screen and press the OK button. Next, remove the Ink Tank.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the ► button.

3.


A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Next, remove the

Ink Tank.

678 Maintenance

Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2  oz])

1.

Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.

Ink Tanks

Caution

• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.

2.

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement. Lift the Ink Tank Lock

Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

Important

• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.

• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the previous position.

Maintenance 679

Ink Tanks

3.

Hold the empty Ink Tank by the grip (a) to remove it, and press the OK button.

Note

• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

• Dispose of used Ink Tanks according to local regulations.

680 Maintenance

Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7  oz])

1.

Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.

Ink Tanks

Caution

• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.

2.

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement. Lift the Ink Tank Lock

Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

Important

• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.

• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the previous position.

Maintenance 681

Ink Tanks

3.

Hold the empty Ink Tank by the handle (a) to remove it, and press the OK button.

Note

• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• Dispose of used Ink Tanks according to local regulations.

682 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

Install the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2  oz])

1.

Before opening the pouch, tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right shaking gently seven or eight times.

Note

• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

2.

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

Note

• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.



Maintenance 683

Ink Tanks

3.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with the ink holes down.

Important

• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.

If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the

Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

4.

Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.

684 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

5.

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

Note

• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the ink.

• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.

6.


The printer now goes online or ofine.

Important

• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close, some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure every Ink Tank Lock Lever is fully closed.

Maintenance 685

Ink Tanks

Install the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7  oz])

1.

Before opening the pouch, hold the new Ink Tank with both hands and tilt it to the left and right as shown shaking gently seven or eight times.

Caution

• The 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank is heavy, so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist.

Note

• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

2.

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

Note

• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.



686 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

3.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with the ink holes down.

Important

• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.

If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the

Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

4.

Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.

Maintenance 687

Ink Tanks

5.

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

Note

• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the ink.

• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.

6.


The printer now goes online or ofine.

Important

• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close, some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure every Ink Tank Lock Lever is fully closed.

• To close the Ink Tank Cover when no Ink Tank is installed (as when moving the printer), push the release lever (a) as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position.

688 Maintenance

Checking Ink Tank Levels

On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.

The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless a message is displayed.

During messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.

Ink Tanks

These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.677)

Maintenance 689

Ink Tanks

When to Replace Ink Tanks

Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen

When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.

You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.689)

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Ink Tank becomes empty, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen. You can continue to print, but replace the Ink Tank.

When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the

Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink

If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.

690 Maintenance

Printheads

Printheads

Printhead

This is a replacement Printhead for the printer.

• Printhead PF-03

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.694)

Checking the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.692)

Improving the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles. Clean the Printhead if the printed test pattern was faint.

For instructions on cleaning the Printhead, see “Cleaning the Printhead”. (→P.693)

Maintenance 691

Printheads

Checking for Nozzle Clogging

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)

1.

Load unused paper.




2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the ► button.

5.


The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.

6.

Check the printing results.

The Printhead L prints the test pattern for nozzle checking on the top line in each color, and the

Printhead R prints the test pattern on the bottom line.

If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.

If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors are clogged.

If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging.

1.

Clean the Printhead. (→P.693)

2.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact your Canon dealer.

692 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printhead

Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note

• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)



1.


Printheads

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

• Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about two minutes to complete.

• Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about three minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.692)

Note

• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B at least two times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

Maintenance 693

Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

When to replace the Printhead

This printer uses two Printheads.

Replace one or both Printheads in the following situations.

• If the printing quality does not improve even after two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu

Replace both Printheads in the following situations.

• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the left printhead.

Replace the left Printhead.

• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the right printhead.

Replace the right Printhead.

• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead

Replace the Printhead that your dealer advised you to replace.

Compatible Printhead

For information on compatible Printhead, see “Printhead”. (→P.691)

Precautions when handling the Printhead

Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.


• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of burns.

Important

• Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is not installed after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect printing quality.

• If you need to store a Printhead temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal contacts (→P.699) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.

• Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.

• Never touch the Printhead nozzles or metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.

694 Maintenance

Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

Follow the steps below to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink to leak from the Printhead, resulting in stains.

Only remove or install the Printhead after selecting Replace P.head in the menu, and follow the instructions on the panel. Removing or installing the Printhead without following the correct procedure may damage the

Printhead.

Note

• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.

• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. During replacement, wear the gloves provided with the new Printhead.

• Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after

Printhead replacement. (→P.49)

1.

If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.

(→P.486)

2.

Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.717)

3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the ► button.

6.


Select Printhead L when replacing Printhead L and Printhead R when replacing Printhead R.

When replacing both, select L & R Printheads. Be sure to specify the correct Printhead.

Ink is now absorbed.

After about three minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

7.

Open the Top Cover.

Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.

Maintenance 695

Printheads

8.

If the Carriage Cover is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Important


• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.

696 Maintenance

Printheads

9.

If the ventilation duct (a) is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Move the Carriage out of the way manually if Carriage is concealing the ventilation duct, and then clean the duct.

10.

Lift the Carriage Cover to open it fully.

11.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.

Maintenance 697

Printheads

12.

Lift the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it fully.

13.

Remove the used Printhead.

Caution

• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.

Note

• Dispose of the used Printhead according to local regulations.

698 Maintenance

14.

Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.

Printheads

Important

• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.

15.

While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange

Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.

Important

• Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas other than the grips.

• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.

• The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.

We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth. This ink is non-toxic.

• Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials according to local regulations.

Maintenance 699

Printheads

16.

With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, tilt the Printhead slightly forward as you insert it in the Carriage. Carefully push the printhead rmly into the Carriage, ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.

17.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.

18.

Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.

700 Maintenance

Printheads

19.

Push the Carriage Cover down toward the front.

20.


Ink now lls the system.

After about ten minutes, the Printhead will be automatically aligned, and the printer will go online.

If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.

Important

• Never remove an Ink Tank or Maintenance Cartridge while the system is lling with ink.

• If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead will not be aligned. In this case, adjust the alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. (→P.649)

Maintenance 701

Cutter Unit

Cutter Unit

Cutter Unit

A reaplacement Cutter Unit.

• Cutter Unit CT-06

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Cutter Unit, see “Replacing the Cutter Unit”. (→P.702)

Replacing the Cutter Unit

Note

• For information on compatible Cutter Unit, see “Cutter Unit”. (→P.702)

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Cutter, and then press the ► button.

5.


After the Carriage is centered, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

Note

• If you do not respond within two minutes, cutter replacement is canceled and the printer goes online automatically. In this case, repeat this procedure.

6.

Open the Top Cover.

702 Maintenance

Cutter Unit

7.

If the Cutter Unit or Carriage Cover is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Important


8.

Holding the Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b), remove it from the Carriage.

Important

• Never touch any part of the Cutter Unit except the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b). This poses a risk of injury and may stain your hands. Also, it may damage the printer.

Caution

• Dispose of the used Cutter Unit in accordance with local regulations.

• Do not disassemble the Cutter Unit. Touching the blade may cause injury.

Maintenance 703

Cutter Unit

9.

Holding the new Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b), push it onto the Carriage until it clicks into place.

Important

• After installing the Cutter Unit, hold it only by the grip (b) and pull the Cutter Unit forward to make sure it does not come off. If the Cutter Unit comes off, it may damage the printer.

10.


The Carriage moves into position and a conrmation message is displayed regarding resetting the cut counter.

If you have replaced the cutter unit, reset the counter.

11.


The printer now goes online.

704 Maintenance

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

A replacement Maintenance Cartridge. Maintenance Cartridge is provided with a Shaft Cleaner.

• Maintenance Cartridge MC-08

Note

• For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.

(→P.705)

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge

For information on the compatible Maintenance Cartridge, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.705)

Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge

Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.

Caution

• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.


Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.

• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance

Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

• Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

Maintenance 705


Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

1.

Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, press the OK button. Steps 2-5 are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 6 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.

Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being lled.

If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to be blurry.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the ► button.

5.


A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

6.

At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

706 Maintenance


7.

Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand under the Maintenance Cartridge to hold it rmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.

Important

• Used Maintenance Cartridge is heavy. Always grasp the cartridge rmly and keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.

• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used

Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

8.

Open the box, remove the plastic bag, packaging material, and Shaft Cleaner, and take out the Maintenance Cartridge.

Important

• Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

Maintenance 707


9.

Attach the packaging material to the used Maintenance Cartridge and put it in the box. Keep it level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper.

10.

Conrm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box, and store it so that it stays level.

Important

• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.

Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

• In accordance with its active and ongoing policy to protect the environment, Canon collects used

Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.

11.

Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

Important

• Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it.

708 Maintenance

12.

Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.


13.

Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

14.


The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.

Next, replace the Shaft Cleaner.

Maintenance 709


Replacing the Shaft Cleaner

Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge. New Shaft Cleaner is included with replacement Maintenance Cartridge.

After you execute Repl. maint cart and replace the Maintenance Cartridge, a message will appear on the

Display Screen requesting you to replace the Shaft Cleaner. Select Yes and press the OK button. Next, go to step 4.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. S. Cleaner, and then press the ► button.

4.


After the Carriage is moved, the Display Screen indicates Open Upper Cover.

Note

• If you do not respond within two minutes, shaft cleaner replacement is canceled and the printer goes online automatically. In this case, repeat the procedure.

5.

Open the Top Cover.

710 Maintenance


6.

Grasp the Shaft Cleaner on the right side of the Carriage by the grips (a) and pull it toward the right to remove it.

Important


Maintenance 711


7.

Holding the new Shaft Cleaner by the grips (a), attach it to the Carriage.

Note

• Be sure to put used Shaft Cleaner in the smaller box and put that box in the box of the used

Maintenance Cartridge for recycling.

8.


The Carriage is moved, and the printer goes online.

712 Maintenance


Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity

The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.

Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display

Screen.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.705)

Maintenance 713


When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.

If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart

replacement. is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.713)

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted

Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.)

To check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the

Maintenance Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the

Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the

Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.

714 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

About once a month, clean the printer exterior.

1.


2.

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Cleaning the Printer

Caution

• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot (a), power cord plug, and so on. Dry these parts with a dry cloth.

Caution

• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.

Important

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

Maintenance 715


4.

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

716 Maintenance


Cleaning Inside the Top Cover

Clean inside the Top Cover to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.

• If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

• After you have used up a roll

• After borderless printing

• After printing on small paper

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris

• If you have replaced the roll

• After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust

Important

• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

1.

Open the Top Cover.

Maintenance 717


2.

If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen, the Borderless Printing

Ink Grooves (b), or cutter guide (c), use the Cleaning Brush (d) included with the printer to wipe it away.

Important


Note

• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

718 Maintenance


3.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller (a), all over the Platen (b), the Paper

Retainer (c), the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (d), the Ejection Guide (e), the cutter guide

(f), the left-side ink suction ports (g), the section around the right-side Borderless Printing Ink

Grooves (h), and so on.

Important

• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust and affect the printing quality.

• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.

• Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller. This may damage the roller.

4.


Maintenance 719



Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note

• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)



1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

• Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about two minutes to complete.

• Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about three minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.692)

Note

• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B at least two times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

720 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Preparing to Transfer the Printer

Important

• Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped in transit.

Note

• It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen prompts you to replace the

Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer preparations. (→P.705)

• Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer (that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).

• Ink must be drained before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer, as described in the following table.

Prepare a Maintenance Cartridge in advance.

• Always follow the instructions of the service representative when transferring the printer under Level 3 conditions.

Level

1

Shipping

Method

(Example)

By truck

Permitted Angle of Inclination

Lengthwise: 0°-30° 0

Amount of Ink to Dispose of

Required

Maintenance

Cartridge *1

0(+1)

Rotation: 0°-10°

2 By plane All directions: 0°-30°

3 Tipping the printer for elevators or stairs

Lengthwise: 0°-90°

Rotation: 0°-30°

*1: Unused Maintenance Cartridge

Approx. 600 ml

(20.3  oz)

1(+1)

Approx. 1,900 ml (64.2  oz)

2(+1)

Maintenance 721

Other Maintenance

To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new location. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.

Caution

• Avoid tipping the printer excessively in transit. Ink inside the printer may leak and cause stains. If it is necessary to stand the printer up or tilt it, contact your Canon dealer.

1.

Remove the paper.

• Roll

(→P.186)

(→P.181)

• Sheet

(→P.216)

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of transfer, and then press the OK button.

The printer now starts preparing for transfer.

Under Level 1 conditions, follow the procedure starting with step 12. There is no need to remove

Ink Tank.

When you are nished preparing to transfer the printer under Level 2 or Level 3 conditions, the

Display Screen prompts you to open the Ink Tank Cover. You must remove the Ink Tank at this point. Follow the procedure starting with step 6.

6.

Open the left and right Ink Tank Covers.

722 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

7.

Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever (a). Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.

8.

Remove the Ink Tank.

Note

• Store the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

Maintenance 723

Other Maintenance

9.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to remove every Ink Tank.

10.

Push down the release lever (a) as shown as you gently return every Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position.

11.


At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.

Important

• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.

When the process is nished, Finished preparing to move printer. Turn off printer. is displayed.

12.

Press the Power button and turn off the printer.

Important

• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tanks, wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.

724 Maintenance

13.

Disconnect the power cord, interface cable, and Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet.

14.


Other Maintenance

15.

Remove the six Ejection Supports and lower the Ejection Guide.

16.

Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper with a hex screw at the position indicated.

Maintenance 725

Other Maintenance

Important

• Attach the Belt Stopper, which was removed and stored after initial installation. Neglecting to attach the Belt Stopper may damage the printer.


17.


18.

Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.

19.

If the Output Stacker is installed, reverse the installation procedure to remove the Output Stacker.

20.

Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.

21.

To disassemble and repackage the Stand, follow the procedure for printer installation with four people (that is, installation by lifting the printer) in reverse.

Caution

• Do not reverse the installation procedure that involves tipping the printer over. This may damage the printer. For more information, see the Quick Start Guide.

22.

Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in the shipping materials, and then package them in the shipping box.

726 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Updating the Firmware

Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.

Conrming the rmware version

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press ►.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the OK button.

The rmware version is displayed.

Updating the Firmware

To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware, visit the Canon website.

Maintenance 727

Frequently Asked Questions

Troubleshooting

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks in the answer column.

Question Answer

How do I print on a roll?

When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify the paper type and length, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver.

⇒

Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.142)

How do I print manually?

How do I switch between printing on a roll and printing manually?

How do I change the paper type or size?

How do I cut the roll paper after printing?

When printing manually, specify the paper type and size in the printer driver, and then load the paper.

⇒

Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.146)

Press the Feeder Selection button to switch the paper source between the roll and a sheet.

⇒

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source (→P.178)

⇒

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source (→P.211)

Specify the type and size of paper, both on the

Control Panel and in the printer driver.

• Specifying it in the Printer Driver

⇒

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.730)

• Specifying it on the Control Panel

Selecting the paper type

⇒

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.188)

⇒

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)

Selecting the Paper Size

⇒

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.189)

You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and you can cut rolls at a desired position.

⇒

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.193)

How do I print without borders?

Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also specify borderless printing in the printer driver by adjusting the original size to match the paper size.

Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

⇒

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size

(→P.365)

⇒

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the

Roll Width (→P.367)

⇒


728 Troubleshooting


Question Answer

How do I print an A4 original enlarged on A2 paper?

In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image to match the paper size or width, or you can specify enlargement or reduction before printing as desired.

⇒

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

(→P.313)

⇒


⇒

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

(→P.315)

How do I print without wasting paper?

To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins.

⇒

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90

Degrees (→P.460)

⇒

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals

Without Top and Bottom Margins (→P.461)

How do I print without wasting all the blank space on the right side when printing an A4-sized original at A3 size?

By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the printer driver, you can print at A4 size to ll the width of A3 paper.

⇒


Degrees (→P.460)

How do I print in landscape (or portrait) orientation?

You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to t the roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or horizontal banners.

⇒

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners

(Large-Format Printing) (→P.395)

How do I print on a custom paper size?

How do I register custom paper sizes?

How do I print lines thicker?

How do I modify how colors are printed?

How do I use printer driver settings again in subsequent jobs?

You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the printer driver.

⇒

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.396)

You can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in the Size Options dialog box of the printer driver.

⇒

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.396)

By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer driver, you can print ne lines thicker to make them easier to see.

⇒

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and

Colors for Printing (→P.243)

You can adjust colors as desired in the printer driver before printing.

⇒


By saving settings information in a favorite, you can apply the settings again before printing anytime as needed.

⇒

Using Favorites (→P.486)

Troubleshooting 729


Question

How do I use the printer in combination with a Color

imageRUNNER ?

How do I print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER ?

Answer

The printer can be used for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color

imageRUNNER .

⇒

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (→P.316)

By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

(iR enlargement copy), you can automatically print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color

imageRUNNER .

⇒

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (→P.316)

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.

For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.




730 Troubleshooting

Printing does not start

Printing does not start

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up

Cause

The printer is not on.

Corrective Action

Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the

Power button to turn the printer on.

The printer is not selected in the printer driver. (The printer is in

Sleep mode.)

The print job is paused. (The printer is in Sleep mode.)

In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in the printing dialog box and try printing again.

In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or

Print Center ) and try printing again.

In Mac OS 9, select the printer in Chooser and try printing again.

In Windows, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.

In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

2.

Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job.

In Mac OS 9, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .

2.

Choose Resume Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent

Cause

The printer is ofine.


Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.

The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink

Cause

When the printer was turned off previously, some cleaning operation was terminated.


Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This process may take about ten minutes.

Troubleshooting 731

Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a network

Cannot connect the printer to the network

Corrective Action Cause

The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.

1.

Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct

Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on connecting the cable, refer to the Quick Start Guide .

2.

Make sure the Link indicator is lit.

The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100

Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.

If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.

• Make sure the hub is on.

• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.

Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.

• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.

If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.

• Check the communication mode with the hub.

Although the printer normally detects the hub communication mode and transmission rate automatically

(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection method manually, specifying the communication mode in use. (→P.733)

732 Troubleshooting


Conguring the Communication Mode Manually

This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press ►.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press ►.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press ►.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press OK.

Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press ►.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press ►.

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press OK.


10.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press ►.

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press OK.


12.


After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK.

The printer will now restart.

Troubleshooting 733


Cannot print over a TCP/IP network

Cause Corrective Action

The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the IP

Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility”. (→P.536) or see “Conguring the IP Address

Using the Printer Control Panel”. (→P.618)

The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not congured correctly.

The computer you are trying to print from is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the

Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings”. (→P.616)

Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)”. (→P.634)

734 Troubleshooting


Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks


The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.

Activate AppleTalk on the printer. For details, see “Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network

Settings”. (→P.637)


The computer and printer are not on the same network.

Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”.

(→P.639) or see “Conguring the Destination for

Bonjour Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.647)

Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if the printer is on another network behind a router.

Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

Troubleshooting 735


Cannot print over a NetWare network

Cause

The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured correctly.


Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid frame type is selected. For details, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.624)


Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring

NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.633)

The NetWare server and services are not congured correctly.

Check the following points.

1.

Make sure the NetWare le server is running.

2.

Make sure there is enough free disk space on the

NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may prevent you from processing large print jobs.

3.

Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that the print service is congured correctly and the print queue is available.

4.

If data transmission to a printer on another subnet fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s network protocol settings.

5.

If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify

“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.

736 Troubleshooting

The printer stops during a print job

The printer stops during a print job

An error message is shown on the Display Screen

Status

An error message is displayed during printing.


Check the error message and take action as necessary.

(→P.763)

The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job, and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.

Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.

(→P.186)

(→P.181)

(→P.142)

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper

Status

The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it.


This operation is normal.

The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim

Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim

Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial preparation.

When Off is selected under Trim Edge First , the edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.

(→P.692)

Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.

(→P.693)

A print job was received from an incompatible printer driver.

Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for the printer and try printing again.

The printer is damaged.

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Troubleshooting 737

Problems with the printing quality

Problems with the printing quality

Printing is faint


You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.

Print on the printing surface.


Because the printer was left without Ink Tanks installed for some time, ink has become clogged in the ink supply system.

Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover .

During borderless printing, the ink was not dry enough before cutting.

Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced

Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or

Draft .

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.692)

After the Ink Tank has been installed for 24 hours, run Head Cleaning B .

(→P.693)

Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover .

1.


2.

Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not over the Platen .

3.

Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover

.

4.

Close the Top Cover .

For tips on clearing paper jams, refer to the following topics.

• Clearing Jammed Roll Paper (→P.201)

• Clearing a Jammed Sheet (→P.217)

Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in

Roll DryingTime in Paper Details .

(→P.49)

In Advanced Settings in the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

(→P.243)

738 Troubleshooting


Paper rubs against the Printhead

Cause

The paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer. (*1)


Load paper of the same type as you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.182)

(→P.212)

Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to wrinkle.

Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing.

2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Reload the paper.

(→P.182)

(→P.212)

The Printhead is set too low.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.653)

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head

Height to Highest . (→P.660) (→P.653)

When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other

lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head

Height to Highest . (→P.660) (→P.653)

When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of

Weakest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head Height to Highest .

(→P.660) (→P.653)

*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer.

Troubleshooting 739


The edges of the paper are dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .

(→P.717)

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.

The paper is wrinkled or warped.

Make sure the same paper type is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.188)

(→P.215)

Make sure the same paper type is specied in the printer driver as on the printer.

1.


2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on previously.

(→P.182)

(→P.212)

A cut line is printed because the function to reduce cutting dust has been activated.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

If this function is not needed, deactivate

CutDustReduct. through the printer menu.

(→P.49)

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try raising the Printhead higher in Head

Height , one level at a time. (→P.660) (→P.653)

The Printhead is set too low.

The Ejection Guide is soiled.

When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard

, Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try raising the Printhead higher in Head Height , one level at a time. (→P.660) (→P.653)

In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.653)

Clean the Ejection Guide . (→P.715)

740 Troubleshooting


The surface of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Paper Retainer is soiled.


Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.717)

You are using a paper that does not dry easily.

Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime .

The back side of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .

(→P.717)

Set CarriageScanWdth to Fixed .

The Platen has become soiled due to printing on the

Platen because width detection is deactivated.

Activate width detection, and open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .

(→P.717)

The Paper Retainer is soiled.

Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.717)

Banding in different colors occurs

Cause

The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly.


Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.654)

Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.

Printing does not proceed smoothly because print jobs are interrupted during transmission.

In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in

Feed Priority .

The Printhead is out of alignment.

Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too low.

Selecting Band Joint may improve printing results.

Adjust the feed amount in the printer menu by specifying Band Joint in Feed Priority and try printing again.

(→P.654)

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(→P.649)

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the

Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try printing again.

(→P.243)

Troubleshooting 741


The contrast becomes uneven during printing

Cause

The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.


Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.654)

Execute Fine Band Adj. during printing.

(→P.654)

Colors in printed images are uneven

Cause

Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images in many solid colors.


Specify Image in the printer driver.

You are printing on paper that curls easily.

Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print

Quality too low.

Color may be uneven between dark and light image areas.

When using Borderless Printing, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may not be even at the edges.

Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase the level of vacuum holding the paper against the

Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more for the leading edge. (→P.660)


Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

(→P.243)

Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced

Settings of the printer driver.

Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.

The Printhead is out of alignment.



(→P.243)


(→P.649)

Drying documents stacked on each other may cause uneven colors.

To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each sheet separately.

Color density may be uneven if you use Glossy

Paper , art paper, or Coated Paper .

In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

742 Troubleshooting


Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper

For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.169)

Lines are misaligned

Cause

The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.



(→P.649)

(→P.651)

The length of printed images is inaccurate

Cause

In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed

Priority .


To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size, select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust

Length . You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02% increments. (→P.49)

Documents are printed in monochrome

Cause

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, Monochrome , Monochrome (Photo) ,

Monochrome (BK ink) , or Monochrome Bitmap is specied in Color Mode .


In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.


Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.692)

Troubleshooting 743


Printed colors are inaccurate

Cause

Color adjustment has not been activated in the



In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust colors.

Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or monitor.


In the printer driver, Application Color Matching

Priority is not selected.

Refer to the computer and monitor documentation to adjust the colors.

Adjust the settings of the color management software, referring to the software documentation as needed.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.692)

Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the printer driver and select Application Color Matching

Priority in the dialog box.

Execute color calibration.

There may be a slight difference in how colors are printed after you replace the Printhead because of individual variation among Printheads .

Printhead characteristics gradually change through repeated use, and colors may change.


Color may change slightly even on the same model of printer if you use a different version of the rmware or printer driver, or when you print under different settings or in a different printing environment.

Follow these steps to prepare the printing environment.

1.

Use the same version of rmware or printer driver.

2.

Specify the same value for all settings items.

3.


The region selection of the Media Conguration Tool was changed when you reinstalled the printer driver.

If you change the region selection of the Media

Conguration Tool , region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper.

Perform color calibration again using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration.

744 Troubleshooting


Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs

Cause

The Platen suction is too strong.


Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest . (→P.660)

The Printhead is set too high.

Lower the Printhead . (→P.653)

Documents are printed crooked

Cause

Skew Skew Check Lv. has been set to Loose or

Off .


Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv. .

Width Detection has been set to Off .

Choose On in Width Detection .

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)

Cause

In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.


Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from

Print in the application software’s File menu, and try printing following the steps below.

1.

Remove the check from Open Preview When

Print Job Starts in the Main sheet.

2.

Remove the check from Page Layout in the

Layout sheet.

3.

Click the Special Settings button in the Layout sheet to open the Special Settings dialog box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic

Process .

Troubleshooting 745

Installation problems

Installation problems

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly

In Windows, the device interface driver may not be installed correctly in some cases if you connected the

IEEE 1394 cable before installing the printer driver.

If so, reinstall the IEEE 1394 device interface driver and the printer driver as follows.

Important

• This procedure is based on an example for Windows XP. The name of the wizard may be different in other operating systems.

1.

Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to display the System Properties window.

2.

On the Hardware sheet, click Device Manager to display the Device Manager window.

3.

Right-click Other Devices icon and choose Properties.

4.

On the Driver sheet, click Update Driver to start the Hardware Update Wizard (or the Upgrade

Device Driver Wizard.)

5.

Follow the instructions on the screen.

6.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the CD-ROM drive. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer and follow the instructions on the screen.

The device/interface driver is installed.

The device is detected, and the New Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware Wizard ) is started.

7.


8.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the printer driver folder.

Choose the CD-ROM drive > Driver > WinXP_2K > Driver, and click OK. (For Windows

2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)

9.


The printer driver is installed.

746 Troubleshooting

Installation problems

Removing Installed Printer Drivers

Follow the steps below to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.

Removing printer drivers (Windows)

Remove the printer driver as follows.

Note

• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights such as “Administrator” account.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller >

imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.

2.

Select the printer in the list and click Delete.

3.

Click Yes in the Warning message dialog box.

4.

Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and click Exit.

Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Macintosh)

Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.

For Mac OS X, open OS X and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.

For Mac OS 9, open OS 9 and double-click iPF Driver Installer 9.

3.

In the upper-left menu, choose Uninstall, and click Uninstall.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Troubleshooting 747

Clearing jammed paper

Clearing jammed paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.

Caution


1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.


748 Troubleshooting


Important

• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.


4.


Troubleshooting 749


5.

Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.

Caution

• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.

6.


Important


750 Troubleshooting


7.

Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the

Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b), keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.

Important


• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.

8.


9.


The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.

Note

• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.

1.


2.

Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.

3.

Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu to cut the edge.

(→P.193)

Troubleshooting 751


Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.

Caution


1.


2.

Open the Top Cover.

3.


Important


752 Troubleshooting


4.


5.

If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.

6.

If the paper is not visible, lift the Ejection Guide, remove the Roll Holder, and remove the jammed paper from below.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer, and lower the Ejection Guide.

Troubleshooting 753


7.


Important


8.


9.


754 Troubleshooting

If the Printer makes a strange sound

If the Printer makes a strange sound

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound

The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.

• There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen

To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.

• There is a sound when a different size of paper is used and when the Carriage goes from side to side

This may happen especially when using B0 or 44-inch paper.

When paper of a different size is used, a valve is automatically activated to switch the area for paper suction, which may make a sound. This mechanism prevents vacuum from Vacuum holes where there is no paper.

In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage back and forth to ensure optimal ink

ow. At this time, the valve automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make a sound.

• Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing

There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.

• If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations

At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.

• If you suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation

At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality, the ink is agitated automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.(*1) The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions.

Note that other operations are not possible while Agitating is displayed on the control panel.

• After you turn the printer on (*2/*3)

• After data transmission (*4)

• After you replace an ink tank (*3/*5)

*1: Ink agitation takes about a minute and a half.

*2: The time for agitation varies depending on how long the printer has been turned off. (Between about a minute and a half to twenty minutes.)

*3: During agitation, if Online mode is accessible, you can print or do other operations.

*4: After about a minute and a half, the printer goes Online, and printing operations begin.

However, printing may start later after data reception, depending on the size of print data.

*5: Ink agitation takes about three and a half minutes.

In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.

Troubleshooting 755

Other problems

Other problems

The printer consumes a lot of ink

Cause

Many full-page color images are printed.


In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

Head Cleaning B is used often.

You have just nished initial installation, when more ink is consumed to ll the system.

Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the printer has been moved or stored for a long period or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend not performing Head Cleaning B , to the extent possible.

After initial installation or at the rst-time use after transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink

Tank and Printhead , which may cause the ink level indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not cleared after you replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Cause

The printer has not detected the new Maintenance

Cartridge .


Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again rmly.

Restart the printer.

Paper is not cut neatly

Cause

The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.

Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before it is cut.

The Cutter Unit is installed incorrectly.

The blade of the Cutter Unit is dull.


Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.

Reload the paper correctly.

Install the Cutter Unit correctly. (→P.702)

Replace the Cutter Unit . (→P.702)

756 Troubleshooting

Other problems

Paper cannot be cut

Cause

In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is specied in Auto Cut .

In MAIN MENU , Eject or Manual is specied in

Cutting Mode .

The Cutter Unit is not installed.


Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.

Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU .

Rolls are not cut when you are using the Media

Take-up Unit .

Install the Cutter Unit .

(→P.702)

Either execute Paper Cutting in the Control Panel or lift the Release Lever and cut the roll with scissors.

(→P.239)

The printer does not go on

Cause

The printer is unplugged.

The specied voltage is not supplied.


Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.

For information on the specied voltage, see

“Specications”. (→P.135)

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot

Cause

The roll paper is warped.


Straighten out curls and reload the roll.

Cannot Load Sheets

Cause

The paper source selection is incorrect.


Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the

Cut Sheet lamp .

Troubleshooting 757

Other problems

The Media Take-up Unit Continues Rotating

Cause

There is a foreign object in the path of the Media

Take-up Sensor (indicated by a dotted line).


Remove the foreign object from the Media Take-up

Sensor path. Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket

Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up

Sensor .

The Media Take-up Sensor cord is not connected to the Right Media Take-up Unit correctly.

Reconnect the Media Take-up Sensor cord as follows.

1.

Turn the printer off.

2.

Disconnect the Media Take-up Sensor cord from the Right Media Take-up Unit and reconnect it

rmly, all the way in.

3.

Turn the printer on.

(→P.230)

If the Media Take-up Unit continues rotating, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

758 Troubleshooting

Other problems

Ink level detection

Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.

Ink level detection

Ink Tanks (→P.676) specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during printing, which prevents printer damage.

This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.

Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.

is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.

Caution

• After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded

Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use with the printer.

• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.

Disabling Ink Level Detection

1.

On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.

A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection.

3.

Press ► and check the message on the Display Screen.

Troubleshooting 759

Other problems

4.


A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen.

5.


A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen.

6.


Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.

760 Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

Error Message

Responding to Messages

Responding to Messages

Warning messages

Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.

Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.763)

Error messages (if action can be taken)

Error messages are indicated on the Display Screen if you must respond before the printer can resume operation.

Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.763)

Error Message 761


Error messages (if no action can be taken)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.

If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your

Canon dealer for assistance.

• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

Note

• Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh).

762 Error Message


Error Messages

Warning messages

Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.

Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the appropriate action.

• GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.784)

• Close Ink Tank Cover (→P.776)

• Ink tank is empty. Replace the ink tank. (→P.775)

• No ink tank loaded. (→P.774)

• Ink Level: Check (→P.774)

• End of paper feed. (→P.771)

• Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.785)

• Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.785)

• Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) (→P.780)

• Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. (→P.782)

• Mail box nearly full. (→P.782)

• Mail box full. Delete unwanted data (→P.782)

• Turn on the media take-up unit. (→P.773)

• Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.781)

• Paper Mismatch (→P.765)

• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.766)

• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.765)

Error messages (if action can be taken)

Check the message and take the appropriate action.

• Ink tank is empty. Press OK and replace ink tank. (→P.775)

• Ink insufcient. (→P.775)

• Ink tank error. (→P.776)

• No ink tank loaded. (→P.774)

• Top cover is open. (→P.784)

• Sheet printing is selected. (→P.768)

• Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.768)

• No sheets. (→P.767)

• Carriage Cover is open. (→P.784)

• Cannot calibrate. (→P.778)

• Insufcient paper for job (→P.767)

• Use another paper. (→P.777)

• This paper cannot be used. (→P.766)

• Cannot print as specied. (→P.777)

• Hard disk error. (→P.783)

• Cannot adjust band. (→P.777)

• Unknown le. (→P.785)

• File read error. (→P.783)

• Borderless printng not possible. (→P.769)

• x printhead error (x is Left or Right) (→P.780)

• x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) (→P.779)

• PHeads: wrong pos. (→P.779)

Error Message 763


• Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.778)

• Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing. (→P.782)

• Mail box full. Cannot save. (→P.782)

• Rewinding error. (→P.773)

• Media take-up unit ready. (→P.773)

• Multi-sensor error (→P.785)

• Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.781)

• Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.781)

• No maintenance cartridge. (→P.781)

• No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.781)

• Paper Mismatch (→P.765)

• Paper jam. (→P.771)

• Paper loaded askew. (→P.770)

• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.766)

• Paper size not detected. (→P.771)

• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.765)

• Leading edge detection error. (→P.771)

• Cannot feed paper. (→P.771)

• Cannot cut paper. (→P.772)

• Rel lever is in wrong position. (→P.772)

• The roll is empty. (→P.773)

• Roll printing is selected. (→P.768)

• Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.768)

Error messages (if no action can be taken)

• Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.785)

• ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.784)

Other Messages

These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:

• Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.776)

• Excessive temperature or humidity. (→P.778)

• Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. (→P.777)

764 Error Message

Messages regarding paper

Messages regarding paper

Paper Mismatch

Cause

You printed a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets, but sheets of different types or sizes of paper were used.


When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same type and size of paper.

Papr Type Mismatch

Cause

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.


Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.142)

(→P.146)

Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.


2.

Either change the type of paper specied in the printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper and change the paper type setting on the printer.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

*Printing will continue if you have set Detect Mismatch to Warning or None.

Error Message 765


Papr Size Mismatch

Cause

The paper size as specied on the printer does not match the size specied in the printer driver.


Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to match the size loaded in the printer as follows.

1.


2.

Change the paper size setting in the printer driver to the size loaded in the printer and try printing again.

Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that matches the size setting in the printer driver as follows.

1.


2.

Replace the loaded paper to match the paper size setting in the printer driver and try printing again.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

This paper cannot be used.

Check supported paper sizes.

Cause

The loaded paper is too large for the printer.

The loaded paper is too small for the printer.

Paper has been loaded that is too small to print the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle checking.


Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.175)

Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.175)

Load unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger. More than one sheet may be required depending on the adjustment.

766 Error Message


Insufcient paper for job

Cause

The printer has received a print job longer than the amount of roll paper left.


Follow the steps below to replace the roll.

1.

Press the Load/Eject button and remove the roll.

(→P.186)

(→P.181)

2.

Load a roll with enough paper left.

(→P.179)

(→P.182)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.188)

4.

Specify the paper length, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll and you have deactivated the automatic detection function of the remaining roll paper.

(→P.189)



However, the roll paper may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.

* When using the Media Take-up Unit, either hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing or press the Online button to continue printing. However, if you continue printing, the roll paper may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.

No sheets.

Cause

A sheet has not been loaded.

Or, paper was removed during feeding.


Load paper of the type and size you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.212)


Error Message 767


Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.

Cause

A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded.



Press the OK button and remove the roll, and then load a sheet of the paper type and size you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.186)

(→P.146)


Change the printer driver settings to match the roll already loaded and try printing again.

You are using a roll with the Media Take-up Unit , but a print job requiring sheets was sent.

1.

Press the Stop button for a second to cancel the job involving sheets.

2.

Choose Paper Cutting in the menu.

3.

Press the Load/Eject button and remove the roll.

4.

Load a sheet and resend the print job.

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.

Cause

A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is loaded.


Press the OK button and remove the sheet.

(→P.216)

Load a roll and try printing again.

(→P.142)


Roll printing is selected.

Cause

You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a roll, but no roll is loaded.


Load a roll and try printing again.

To print on a sheet instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a sheet, and then print. (→P.146)

Sheet printing is selected.


You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet is loaded.

Load a sheet and try printing again.

To print on a roll instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll, and then print. (→P.142)

768 Error Message


Borderless printng not possible.

Check roll position.

Cause

The paper is loaded askew.

The paper loaded is not compatible with borderless printing.


Press the Load/Eject button and reload the paper.

Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the

Roll Holder .

(→P.179)

(→P.182)

If you press the Online button and continue printing, the document will be printed with a border.

Load paper compatible with borderless printing and try printing again. Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the


Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use, it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for borderless printing.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the


Lift the release lever and reload paper.

Cause

Data for a borderless printing job was sent when you are using the Media Take-up Unit , but the paper is loaded crooked.


Lift the Release Lever and reload the paper.

Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the

Roll Holder .

(→P.179)


Check supported paper.

Cause

The print job received species a type or width of paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.


Follow these steps to change the settings of the print job to enable borderless printing.

1.


2.

Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer is selected and try printing again.

For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide . (→P.169)


Error Message 769


Paper loaded askew.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew.


Follow the steps below to reload the roll.

1.

Lift the Release Lever .

2.

Open the Top Cover .

3.

Align the right edge of the roll paper parallel to the

Paper Alignment Line .

4.

Lower the Release Lever .

5.


(→P.182)

Remove the Roll Holder , insert the roll on the Roll

Holder rmly until it reaches the ange, and load the

Roll Holder in the printer again.

(→P.179)

Follow the steps below to reload the sheet.

1.

Lift the Release Lever .

2.

Open the Top Cover .

3.

Align the right edge of the sheet parallel to the

Paper Alignment Line and the trailing edge of the sheet parallel to the paper alignment line under the Paper Retainer .

4.


5.


(→P.212)

Note

• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams as paper may be askew when it is printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.

770 Error Message


Paper size not detected.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has been loaded.


Reload paper straight, in the correct position.

(→P.182)

(→P.212)

Remove the Roll Holder , insert the roll on the Roll

Holder rmly until it reaches the ange, and load the

Roll Holder in the printer again.

(→P.179)

Leading edge detection error.

Cause

A roll has been loaded when sheets are selected as the paper source on the Control Panel .


Either remove the roll and load a sheet or select the roll as the media source on the Control Panel .

The sheet is loaded askew.

Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.

(→P.212)

End of paper feed.

Cause

You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.


Release the ▲ button.

Paper can be retracted only up to 17 mm when using the Media Take-up Unit .

Release the ▲ button.

Cannot feed paper.

Cause

Paper came out of the feed path during feeding.


Reload the paper correctly and advance it again.

(→P.182)

If the message is displayed when paper is not being advanced, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Paper jam.


A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.

Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.

(→P.201)

(→P.217)

Error Message 771


Cannot cut paper.

Cause

There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide .

There is a foreign object by the Output Tray , obstructing the Cutter Unit .

Remove the foreign object.

You are not using the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper.

Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the paper are met.

Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)

You are using paper that is not compatible with automatic cutting.

The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.

The Cutter Unit is not installed.

In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.


Remove the paper.

Cut the roll manually.

(→P.193)

Move the Carriage to the left, remove the paper, and return the Carriage to the right. If the roll cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit , cut the roll manually.

(→P.201)

(→P.217)

(→P.193)

Install the Cutter Unit .

(→P.702)


Rel lever is in wrong position.

Cause

The Release Lever is up.



If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.

772 Error Message


The roll is empty.

Cause

There is no more paper left on the roll.


Follow the steps below to replace the used roll with a new roll of the same type and size.

1.

Remove the roll.

(→P.186)

(→P.181)

2.

Load the new roll.

(→P.182)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.188)

4.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper length.

(→P.189)

Rewinding error.

Cause

There is some foreign object near the Media Take-up

Unit sensor and the roll cannot be detected.


Remove the foreign object near the sensor.

Wipe the sensor with a dry cloth to clean it.

The Media Take-up Unit sensor is soiled and the roll cannot be detected.

The roll is out of range of detection of the Media

Take-up Unit sensor.

The Media Take-up Unit sensor is damaged.

Reload the roll. (→P.182)


* Printing will stop momentarily if an error involving the Media Take-up Unit occurs. If you prefer printing not to stop, set Skip Take-Up Err to On.

Turn on the media take-up unit.

Cause

The Media Take-up Unit was off when you selected

Enable for Take-up Reel .


Turn the Media Take-up Unit on.

Media take-up unit ready.


The Take-up Reel setting in the printer MAIN MENU was changed from Enable to Disable , but a print job was received before the roll was removed.

Press the Stop button and stop printing.

The mode switches from take-up mode to regular mode after you change the Take-up Reel setting in the MAIN MENU from Enable to Disable and lift the

Release Lever , or after you execute Paper Cutting .


Error Message 773

Messages regarding ink

Messages regarding ink

Ink Level: Check

Cause

Not much ink is left.


Prepare a new Ink Tank .

We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink

Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or high-quantity jobs.

No ink tank loaded.

Cause

There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer.


Load or reload the Ink Tank .

(→P.677)

There is a problem with the Ink Tank .

Replace it with a new Ink Tank .

(→P.677)

774 Error Message


Ink insufcient.

Cause

The ink level is low, so you cannot print, clean the

Printhead , or do other operations that require ink.


Replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank .

(→P.677)

Ink tank is empty. Please OK and replace the ink tank.

Cause

There is no ink left.


Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.

(→P.677)

Ink tank is empty.

Cause

There is no ink left in an ink tank.


Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.

(→P.677)

Error Message 775


Close Ink Tank Cover

Cause

The Ink Tank Cover is open.


Close the Ink Tank Cover .

Ink tank error.

Cause

The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.


Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.

(→P.677)

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.

Cause

Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use rell ink tanks.


The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate action. (→P.759)

776 Error Message

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Use another paper.

Cause

The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted when highly transparent lm is loaded.


We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.

(→P.649)

Adjust the feed amount manually.

(→P.657)

Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.


The loaded paper cannot be used for color calibration. Load paper compatible with color calibration.*1 See

"Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.169)

*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

Cannot print as specied.

Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger

Cause

The loaded paper is too small.


Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.

Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll

Cause

The loaded paper is too small.


Load a roll 10 inches wide or larger.

Cannot adjust band.

Cause



Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.

1.


(→P.692)

2.


(→P.693)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.657)

Error Message 777

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.692)

2.


(→P.693)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.


(→P.649)

Excessive temperature or humidity.

Cause

The temperature or humidity where the printer is installed is out of the acceptable range for printer operation.


Press the Stop button and stop printing.

Use the printer in an environment that meets the requirements for the operating environment. Note that various environmental conditions are also recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see "Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.169)

Press the OK button and complete color calibration.

However, calibration may not be completed successfully.

Cannot calibrate.

Cause

The paper for printing a test pattern for adjustment is soiled. Otherwise, colored paper is loaded.


Load unused paper compatible with color calibration.

(→P.169)

The printed test pattern is faint.

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

Take steps to remedy the faint printing.

(→P.738)

Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.

778 Error Message

Messages regarding printheads

Messages regarding printheads

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.692)

2.


(→P.693)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.


(→P.649)

Cannot adjust band.

Cause




1.


(→P.692)

2.


(→P.693)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.657)

x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)

Cause



Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.693)

If the message is still displayed after you execute

Head Cleaning B two or three times, contact your


PHeads: wrong pos.

Cause

The left Printhead is installed in the right position and vice versa.


Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power. If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Error Message 779

Messages regarding printheads

Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.


If printing is faint, clean the Printhead . (→P.693)

x printhead error (x is Left or Right)

Cause

An incompatible Printhead has been installed.


Install a Printhead specied for use with the printer. If

“Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L ; if

“Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead R .

(→P.694)

There is a problem with the Printhead .

Open the Top Cover . If the Carriage is over the

Platen , replace the Printhead with a new one. If

“Printhead L” is displayed, replace the Printhead L ; if

“Printhead R” is displayed, replace the Printhead R .

(→P.694)

If, after opening the Top Cover , you see that the

Carriage is not over the Platen , follow the steps below.

1.

Close the Top Cover and press the Online button.

2.

If “Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L

; if “Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead

R .

(→P.694)

780 Error Message

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

No maintenance cartridge.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.


Install the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.705)

Prepare for maint cart replacement.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.


You can continue to print, but prepare a new

Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed.

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.705)

Maintenance cartridge full.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is full.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.705)

Maintenance cartridge problem.

Cause

An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has been installed.


Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for use with the printer.

(→P.705)

Error Message 781

Messages regarding the hard disk

Messages regarding the hard disk

Mail box nearly full.

Cause

The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer’s hard disk does not have more than 1

GB, combined.


Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

(→P.109)

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.

Cause

No more space is available on the printer’s hard disk, so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)


After printing, this message is cleared.

Mail box full. Cannot save.

Cause

Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity.


Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.

Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.115)

Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.

(→P.109)

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing.

Cause

There is no more space on the printer’s hard disk.


Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.

Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.115)

Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.

(→P.109)

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data

Cause

100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.


Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.

(→P.109)

782 Error Message

Messages regarding the hard disk

Hard disk error.

Cause

The format of the printer’s hard disk is invalid.


Press the OK button to start reformatting the hard disk. When formatting is nished, the printer automatically restarts. (Formatting will erase all data on the hard disk.)

File read error.

Cause

Files on the printer’s hard disk have become corrupted.


Restart the printer. Only the corrupted les will be deleted, and the printer will restart.

Error Message 783

Other Messages

Other Messages

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)

Cause

There is a problem with the print job.


Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.

It is also possible to continue printing in this state.

However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.

Top cover is open.

Cause

The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.


Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover again.


Carriage Cover is open.

Cause

The Carriage Cover is open.


Close the Carriage Cover . (→P.694)


ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.



• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

784 Error Message

Other Messages

Unknown le.

Cause

Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as paper information) is in the wrong format.

You have uploaded rmware for a different model.


Check the print job. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power, and then resend the data.

Check the rmware version. Turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power, and then resend the rmware.

If the message is displayed again, contact your


Prepare for parts replacement.

Cause

It is almost time to replace consumables for which service is required.


If Parts replacement time has passed. is displayed, you can continue to use the printer for some time.


Parts replacement time has passed.

Cause

It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required.



Multi-sensor error

Cause

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be impaired.


Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.


Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power. However, keep the printer off and remove the roll if the last portion of roll paper was used during a print job and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll. If tape and the Belt Stopper have not been removed from inside the Top Cover, turn off the printer, open the Top Cover, and remove the tape and Belt Stopper before restoring power.



• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

Error Message 785

786

Index

Index

A

A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not cleared after you replace the Maintenance

Cartridge .................................................................756

About This User Manual .............................................1

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Mac OS 9) .........................................602


Applications (Mac OS X) ........................................577


Applications (Windows) ..................................538, 674

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows) ...............206, 540

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) .....................594

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) ....................570

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver .................254

Color Adjustment ..............................................254

Color Mode .......................................................254

Gray Tone Adjustment ......................................256

Matching ...........................................................255

Adjusting the feed amount ......................................654

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically ..............654

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........656

Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually .....................657

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........659

Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better

Accuracy .................................................................661

Adjusting the Printhead ..........................................649

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically ...649

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually ..........651

Adjusting the Printhead Height ...............................653

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ..............................660

An error message is shown on the Display

Screen ....................................................................737

B

Back ...........................................................................9

Banding in different colors occurs ..........................741

Basic Environmental Performance .........................140

Packaging materials .........................................140

Printer ...............................................................140

Basic Printing Workflow ..........................................142

Borderless Printing .................................................365

Borderless Printing at Actual Size ..................348, 369

Borderless Printing .................................348, 369

Borderless Printing Method ....................348, 369

Print Image with Actual Size ...................349, 370

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

(Mac OS 9) .....................................................355, 376


(Mac OS X) .....................................................352, 373


(Windows) ......................................................350, 371


Roll (Windows) .......................................................379


Roll Width ...............................................................367

Borderless Printing .........................................367

Borderless Printing Method ............................367

Scale to fit Roll Paper Width ...........................368


Roll Width (Mac OS 9) ............................................384


Roll Width (Mac OS X) ...........................................381

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the

Paper Size (Mac OS 9) ..........................................392


Paper Size (Mac OS X) ..........................................389


Paper Size (Windows) ............................................387

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ....365

Borderless Printing .........................................365

Borderless Printing Method ............................365

Fit Media Size .................................................366

Borderless printng not possible. .............................769

Check roll position. ...........................................769

Check supported paper. ...................................769

Lift the release lever and reload paper. ............769

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing

(Windows) ..............................................................667

C

Canceling print jobs ................................................162

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9 .....................166

Canceling background print jobs ......................166

Canceling foreground print jobs .......................167

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X .....................164

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel .........162

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .......................163

Index 787

Index

Cannot adjust band. .......................................777, 779

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................778, 779

Cannot calibrate. ....................................................778

Cannot connect the printer to the network .............732

Cannot cut paper. ...................................................772

Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. ..777

Cannot feed paper. .................................................771

Cannot Load Sheets ...............................................757

Cannot print as specified. .......................................777

Cannot print over a NetWare network ....................736

Cannot print over a network ...................................732

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network .......................734

Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ..735

Carriage .................................................................... 11

Carriage Cover is open. .........................................784

Centering originals .................................................443

Checking a List of Saved Jobs .................................80

Displaying a List of Saved Jobs .........................80

Printing a List of Saved Jobs ..............................84

Checking for Nozzle Clogging ................................692

Checking Ink Tank Levels .......................................689

Checking the Free Hard Disk Space ......................129

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ...............131

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ...........130

Using RemoteUI ...............................................129

Using the Control Panel ...................................129

Checking the Layout Before Printing ......................560

Preview (Macintosh) .........................................560

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) ..561

Checking the Print Quality ......................................691

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge

Capacity .................................................................713

Choosing a Paper for Printing ................................242

If the paper type is not listed for selection ........242

Media type ........................................................242

Choosing the Document Type and Printing

Conditions (Mac OS 9) ...........................................264


Conditions (Mac OS X) ...........................................261


Conditions (Windows) ............................................259

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ...............................717

Cleaning the Printer ................................................715

Cleaning the Printer Exterior ..................................715

Cleaning the Printhead ...................................693, 720

Cleaning the Printhead ...........................693, 720

Clearing a Jammed Sheet ..............................217, 752

Clearing jammed paper ..........................................748

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .........................201, 748

Close Ink Tank Cover .............................................776

Color adjustment ....................................................663

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) .................604

Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................604

Matching pane ..................................................606

Object Adjustment dialog box ...........................605

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) .................578

Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................578

Matching pane ..................................................579

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) .....607

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome ..............607


Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) .....580

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome ..............580

Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows) ..................542

Color Adjustment : color ...................................542

Light Source Check Tool ..................................547

Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode

(Kyuanos) .........................................................546

Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode ............544

Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM

Mode, and Host ICM Mode ..............................545


Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) .....548

Color Adjustment : monochrome ......................548


Colors in printed images are uneven ......................742

Configuring NetWare Network Settings ..................633

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually ....733

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................639

Activating AppleTalk on the printer ...................639

Configuring the destination (Mac OS 9) ...........640

Configuring the destination (Mac OS X) ...........641

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................647

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................643

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS 9) ...........643

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X) ..........645

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ..............614

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands .............................................................619

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility ........................................536, 636

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel ......................................................................618

788 Index

Index

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Macintosh) .............................................................638

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Windows) ..............................................................634

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network

Settings ..................................................................637

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network

Settings ..................................................................624

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network

Settings ..................................................................616

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9) ....................584

Checking a preview of the settings ...................584

Checking a print preview ..................................585

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) ....................558

Check a preview of the settings .......................558


Confirming Print Settings (Windows) ......................508

Checking a preview of the settings ...................508


Confirming the Print Image Before Printing ............550

Conserving roll paper .............................................460

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without

Top and Bottom Margins ........................................461

No Spaces at Top or Bottom

(Conserve Paper) .............................................461


Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9) .....................467


Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) .....................464


Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ......................462


Degrees ..................................................................460

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) .....460


Degrees (Mac OS 9) ..............................................474


Degrees (Mac OS X) ..............................................471


Degrees (Windows) ................................................469

Control Panel ............................................................14

Correcting Print Misalignment ................................649

Cutter Unit ..............................................................702

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .............................486

Automatic Cutting ...........................................486

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9) .........492

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) .........490

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ...........489

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper

Automatically ..........................................................192

D

Deleting Saved Jobs ..............................................109

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ............... 114

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ........... 112

Using RemoteUI ............................................... 110

Using the Control Panel ...................................109

Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper ..................191

Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) ..........................593

Device Settings Sheet (Windows) ..........................527

Digital Photo Front-Access .....................................537

Disabling the Take-Up Reel Function .....................231

Documents are printed crooked .............................745

Documents are printed in monochrome .................743

E

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors

Occur ......................................................................623

Enabling the Take-Up Reel Function ......................231

End of paper feed. ..................................................771

Enhanced Printing Options .....................................242

Erasing all data on the printer's hard disk ..............132

ERROR Exxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................784

Error Message ........................................................761

F

Error Messages ......................................................763

Error messages (if action can be taken) ...........763

Error messages (if no action can be taken) ......764

Other Messages ...............................................764

Warning messages ...........................................763

Excessive temperature or humidity. ........................778

Favorites Sheet (Windows) ....................................524

Feeding Roll Paper Manually .................................190

File read error. ........................................................783

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................273


(Mac OS X) .............................................................270


(Windows) ..............................................................267

Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing

Photos (Mac OS 9) .................................................281


Photos (Mac OS X) ................................................278


Photos (Windows) ..................................................276

Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) ....................................591

Index 789

Index

Frequently Asked Questions ..................................728

Front ...........................................................................7

G

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ..................784

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and

Colors for Printing ...................................................243

Advanced Settings ...........................................243

Color Settings ...................................................245

Enhancing Printing Quality ...............................246

Print Priority ......................................................243

Print Quality ......................................................244

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) ........................592

Gray Adjustment ...............................................592

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) ........................569

Gray Adjustment ...............................................569

Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) ........................523

Gray Adjustment ...............................................523

H

I

Handling Paper .......................................................168

Handling rolls ..........................................................178

Handling sheets for paper feed slots ...................... 211

Hard Disk ..................................................................71

Hard disk error. .......................................................783

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................785

How to use this manual ..............................................1

HTML Version of the Manual for Printing ....................3

IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board .................134

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ....................755

Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding

Occurs ....................................................................745

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................534

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh) ....575, 600 imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) ..........533

Improving the Print Quality .....................................691

Initializing the Network Settings .............................615

Ink insufficient. ........................................................775

Ink level detection ...................................................759

Disabling Ink Level Detection ...........................759

Ink level detection .............................................759

Ink Level: Check .....................................................774

Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .............................................12

Ink tank error. .........................................................776

L

Ink tank is empty. ....................................................775

Ink tank is empty. Please OK and replace the ink tank. ..................................................................775

Ink Tanks ................................................................676

Installation problems ..............................................746

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility ...............................................................535, 635

Insufficient paper for job .........................................767

Introduction .................................................................1

Layout Sheet (Windows) ........................................521

Leading edge detection error. .................................771

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows) ................745

Lines are misaligned ..............................................743

Loading and Printing on Rolls ................................142

Loading and Printing on Sheets .............................146

Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media

Take-up Unit ...........................................................232

Loading the Roll in the Printer ................................182

Loading the Sheet in the Printer .............................212

M

Mac OS 9 ...............................................................583

Mac OS X ...............................................................557

Mail box full. Cannot save. .....................................782

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data .......................782

Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing. ..................................782

Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. ......782

Mail box nearly full. .................................................782

Main Menu Operations .............................................30

Accessing Menus ...............................................31

Executing menu commands ...............................34

Specifying menu items .......................................32

Specifying numerical values ...............................33

Main Menu Settings ..................................................49

Adjust Printer ......................................................54

Information .........................................................59

Interface Setup ...................................................55

Job Management ................................................53

Maintenance .......................................................56

Media Menu ........................................................50

Paper Details ......................................................51

System Setup .....................................................57

Main Menu Settings (During Printing) ......................60

Information .........................................................61

Job Mgmt Menu ..................................................62

790 Index

Index

Main Pane (Mac OS 9) ...........................................587

Configuration using Advanced Settings ............588

Configuration using Easy Settings ...................587

Main Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................564



Main Sheet (Windows) ...........................................515



Maintenance ...........................................................649

Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................705

Maintenance cartridge full. .....................................781

Maintenance cartridge problem. .............................781

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation ..............................................................485

Mirror ..............................................................485

Orientation ......................................................485

Rotate 180 degrees ........................................485


Orientation (Mac OS 9) ..........................................499


Orientation (Mac OS X) ..........................................496


Orientation (Windows) ............................................494

Managing Saved Jobs ..............................................91

Displaying details of saved jobs .........................97

Moving saved jobs ..............................................91

Renaming saved jobs .......................................102

Manually Loading Paper to the Position for

Printing ...........................................................150, 220

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box

(Mac OS 9) .....................................................210, 609


(Mac OS X) .....................................................209, 581


(Windows) ......................................................208, 551

Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) ............552

Media Take-up Unit .........................................133, 228

Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ..........................17, 229

Media take-up unit ready. .......................................773

Menu Structure .........................................................35

Main Menu ..........................................................35

Main menu during printing ..................................47

Submenus ..........................................................46

Messages regarding ink .........................................774

Messages regarding paper .....................................765

Messages regarding printheads .............................779

Messages regarding printing or adjusment ............777

Messages regarding the hard disk .........................782

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ...781

Modifying Personal Boxes ...................................... 119

Naming Personal Boxes ...................................124

Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes ............ 119

Modifying the Current Job

(Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs) ...................... 115

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor ............... 118

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor ........... 117

Using RemoteUI ............................................... 116

Using the Control Panel ................................... 116

Multi-sensor error ...................................................785

N

Network Environment .............................................612

Network environment .......................................613

System requirements .......................................612

Network Setting ......................................................612

Network Setting (Macintosh) ..................................637

Network Setting (Windows) ....................................624

No ink tank loaded. .................................................774

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. .......................781

No maintenance cartridge. .....................................781

No sheets. ..............................................................767

O

Optional accessories ..............................................133

Other Maintenance .................................................721

Other Messages .....................................................784

Other problems .......................................................756

Other useful settings ..............................................484

Output Stacker .................................................18, 221

P

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) ................................589

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ...............................566

Page Setup Sheet (Windows) ................................519

Paper ......................................................................168

Paper size ........................................................168

Types of paper ..................................................168

Paper cannot be cut ...............................................757

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Mac OS X) .............................................................563

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Windows) .............................................................. 511

Paper is not cut neatly ............................................756

Paper jam. ..............................................................771

Paper loaded askew. ..............................................770

Index 791

Index

Paper Mismatch .....................................................765

Paper rubs against the Printhead ...........................739

Paper size not detected. .........................................771

Paper Sizes ............................................................175

Rolls .................................................................175

Sheets ..............................................................176

Papr Size Mismatch ...............................................766

Papr Type Mismatch ...............................................765

Parts replacement time has passed. ......................785

PHeads: wrong pos. ...............................................779

Prepare for maint cart replacement. .......................781

Prepare for parts replacement. ...............................785

Preparing to Transfer the Printer ............................721

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9) .....586

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X) ....562

Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows) ......510

Print Area ................................................................141

Rolls .................................................................141

Sheets ..............................................................141

Print quality and color settings ...............................242

Printed colors are inaccurate ..................................744

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9) .........................583

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) ........................557

Printer Driver Settings (Windows) ..........................506

Printer Hard Disk Operations ...................................71

Printer Menu Operations ..........................................28

Main menu operations during printing ................28

Main menu operations when no print job is in progress .............................................................28

Submenu operations ..........................................29

Printer Modes ...........................................................21

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel .......25

Mode transition ...................................................22

Modes .................................................................21

Offline, and state of the Control Panel ...............24

Online, and state of the Control Panel ...............23

Submenu mode, and state of the

Control Panel ......................................................25

Printer Parts ...............................................................7

Printer Specifications ..............................................135

Printhead ................................................................691

Printheads ..............................................................691

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) ...............597

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ...............572

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) ................530

Printing at full size ..................................................346

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9) .............................363

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) .............................360

Printing at Full Size (Windows) ..............................358

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ....395

Printing CAD Drawings ...........................................476

Printing does not start ............................................731


Color imageRUNNER .............................................316


Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) .........................319

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. ..............................................320

Registering a hot folder on your computer .......319

Scanning the original and print an enlargement .....................................................320


Color imageRUNNER (Windows) ...................317, 553

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. .......................................318, 554

Registering a hot folder on your computer ..................................................317, 553

Scanning the original and print an enlargement .............................................318, 554

Printing enlargements or reductions .......................313

Printing from Mac OS 9 ..........................................154

Printing from the application software ..............155

Selecting the printer .........................................154

Printing from Mac OS X ..........................................152

Printing from the application software ..............153

Registering the printer ......................................152

Printing from Photoshop .........................................487

Using the Plug-in to Print ..................................487

Using the Printer Driver to Print ........................487

Printing from Windows ...........................................151

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient

Light ........................................................................671

Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment ...................................................257, 666

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing ......................................................257, 666

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured

Ambient Light ...........................................257, 666

Printing is faint ........................................................738

Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9) ........................424

Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..........................422

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) ..........252

Easy Settings ...................................................252

Print Target .......................................................252

Print targets for line drawings and text .............252

Printing Line Drawings and Text

(Mac OS 9) .....................................................289, 481


(Mac OS X) .....................................................286, 479

792 Index

Index


(Windows) ......................................................284, 477


(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................251

Easy Settings ...................................................251

Print Target .......................................................251

Print targets for line drawings and text .............251

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......417

Free Layout (Windows) ....................................417

imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh) ......418

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Mac OS X) .............................................................428

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Windows) ..............................................................426

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .....................419

Roll paper (banner) ..........................................419

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................433


(Mac OS X) .............................................................431


(Windows) ..............................................................430

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ..........................420

Page Layout ...................................................420

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) ......440

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ......437

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ........435

Printing Office Documents ......................................253

Easy Settings .................................................253

Print Target .....................................................253

Print targets for office documents .....................253

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9) ..................295

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) ..................293

Printing Office Documents (Windows) ....................291

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..................396

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver .....................................................396

Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use ....................................................................396

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................403


(Mac OS X) .............................................................401


(Windows) ..............................................................397

Printing by using Custom Media Size ...............399

Printing by using Custom Size .........................397

Printing on Oversized Paper ..................................346

Oversize .........................................................346

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ...............149

Paper size ........................................................149

Printing options using rolls and sheets .............149

Rolls and sheets ...............................................149

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ......................443

Centering originals relative to roll paper width .443

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................450


(Mac OS X) .............................................................447


(Windows) ..............................................................445

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ...................444

Centering originals on sheets ...........................444

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................457


(Mac OS X) .............................................................455


(Windows) ..............................................................453

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) ................249

Easy Settings ...................................................249

Print Target .......................................................249

Print targets for photos and images .................249

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) ................302

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ...............299

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .................297

Printing Photos and Images

(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................247

Easy Settings ...................................................247

Print Target .......................................................247

Print targets for photos and images .................247

Printing Photos in Monochrome .............................258

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ..........310

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) .........307

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) ...........305

Printing Posters in Sections ...................................421

Page Layout ...................................................421

Printing procedure ..................................................142

Printing Saved Jobs .................................................85

Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .................90

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor .............88

Using RemoteUI .................................................86

Using the Control Panel .....................................85


(Large-Format Printing) ..........................................395

Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................395

Index 793

Index


(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9) ........................413

Print the banner ................................................415

Register a Custom Media Size .........................413


(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) ........................410

Printing the banner ........................................... 411

Register a Custom Page Size ..........................410


(Large-Format Printing; Windows) .........................406

Creating the banner in the application ..............407

Printing the banner ...........................................407

Registering a Custom Media Size ....................406

Printing With Watermarks .......................................484

Watermark ......................................................484

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) ............................................503

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ..............................................501

Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) ............780

Problems with the printing quality ...........................738

Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper ..........................................................743

R

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ..........................197

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. ....768

Rel lever is in wrong position. .................................772

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. .................................................................776

Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder ....................181

Removing Installed Printer Drivers .........................747

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

(Windows) ........................................................747

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

(Windows) ........................................................747

Removing printer drivers (Windows) ................747

Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh) ..................................747

Removing Printed Documents from the

Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ................................239

Removing the Roll from the Printer ........................186

Removing the Sheet ...............................................216

Replacing Ink Tanks ...............................................677

Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement .....678

Compatible Ink Tank .........................................677

How to Replace the Ink Tank ............................677

Install the Ink Tank (330ml [11.2 fl oz]) .............683

Install the Ink Tank (700ml [23.7 fl oz]) .............686

Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement ......................................................678

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank ...........677

Remove the Ink Tank (330ml [11.2 fl oz]) .........679

Remove the Ink Tank (700ml [23.7 fl oz]) .........681

Replacing the Cutter Unit .......................................702

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ....................705

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge ..................705

Precautions when handling the Maintenance

Cartridge ...........................................................705

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ..............706

Replacing the Shaft Cleaner ............................710

Replacing the Printhead .........................................694

Compatible Printhead .......................................694

Precautions when handling the Printhead ........694

Replacing the Printhead ...................................695

When to replace the Printhead .........................694

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ......315

Enlarged/Reduced Printing ............................315

Scaling ............................................................315


(Mac OS 9) .............................................................326


(Mac OS X) .............................................................323


(Windows) ..............................................................321

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..................314


Fit Roll Paper Width .......................................314

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................335


(Mac OS X) .............................................................332


(Windows) ..............................................................330

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ...........313


Fit Media Size .................................................313


(Mac OS 9) .............................................................343


(Mac OS X) .............................................................340


(Windows) ..............................................................338

Responding to Messages .......................................761

Error messages (if action can be taken) ...........761

Error messages (if no action can be taken) ......762

Warning messages ...........................................761

Rewinding error. .....................................................773

Roll Holder Set ...............................................133, 205

794 Index

Index

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed

Slot .........................................................................757

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. .....768

Roll printing is selected. .........................................768

S

Saved Print Jobs ......................................................72

Format of saved print jobs ..................................72

Storage destination ............................................73

Saving Print Jobs .....................................................74

Using imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in .................79

Using the printer driver (Mac OS 9) ....................78

Using the printer driver (Mac OS X) ...................76

Using the printer driver (Windows) .....................74

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) ..............................188

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) ...........................215

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source ..................178

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source .............. 211

Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder .........................179

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows) ...........512

Sheet printing is selected. ......................................768

Software .................................................................506

Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) ................610

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .................555

Specifications .........................................................135

Hard Disk ..........................................................139

Ink .....................................................................137

Interface ...........................................................136

Paper ................................................................138

Printer ...............................................................135

Printing performance ........................................136

Specifying NetWare Print Services .........................628

Choosing the type of print services ..................628

Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server .......................................................629

Specifying NetWare Protocols ................................631

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ....................730

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................160


(Mac OS X) .............................................................158


(Windows) ..............................................................156

Specifying Printer-Related Information ...................621

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .................193

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing) .........194

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit) .......................................195

Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position) .............................................196

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .................198

Mac OS 9 .........................................................200

Mac OS X .........................................................199

Windows ...........................................................198

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) .........................189

Specifying the Printer's Frame Type .......................626

Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ..............626

Specifying the frame type using the printer

Control Panel ....................................................627

Stand ........................................................................16

Status Print ...............................................................64

Checking the information in the Status Print report ..................................................................64

Printing Status Print Reports ..............................64

Stowing the Output Stacker ....................................226

Submenu Display .....................................................63

Information of the loaded paper .........................63

Printer information ..............................................63

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels .............................................................63

Support Pane (Mac OS X) ......................................571

Support Sheet (Windows) ......................................526

Switching Modes ......................................................26

Switching the Printer Online/Offline ....................26

Switching to Menu Mode ....................................27

T

The back side of the paper is dirty .........................741

The contrast becomes uneven during printing .......742

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ..............................................................731

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink ..........................................................731

The edges of the paper are dirty ............................740

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed

Correctly .................................................................746

The length of printed images is inaccurate .............743

The Media Take-up Unit Continues Rotating ..........758

The printer consumes a lot of ink ...........................756

The printer does not go on .....................................757

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent ..................................................................731

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ...............737

The printer stops during a print job .........................737

The roll is empty. ....................................................773

The surface of the paper is dirty .............................741

Index 795

Index

This paper cannot be used. ....................................766

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ........................417

Top Cover (Inside) ....................................................10

Top cover is open. ..................................................784

Troubleshooting ......................................................728

Turn on the media take-up unit. ..............................773

Turning the Printer On and Off .................................19

Turning the printer off .........................................20

Turning the printer on .........................................19

Types of Paper .......................................................169

Updating paper information ..............................173

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide ................170

U

Unknown file. ..........................................................785

Updating the Firmware ...........................................727

Confirming the firmware version .......................727

Updating the Firmware .....................................727

Use another paper. .................................................777

Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors ................663

Using Favorites ......................................................486

Favorites .........................................................486

Using Favorites (Mac OS 9) ...................................595

Printing using the favorite .................................595

Registering a favorite .......................................595

Using Favorites (Mac OS X) ...................................571

Using Favorites (Windows) ....................................513

Printing using the favorite .................................514

Registering a favorite .......................................513

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ...............488

Edit Using PosterArtist ...................................488

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

(Windows) ..............................................................528

Using RemoteUI .....................................................622

Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional) ................230

Using the Output Stacker .......................................221

Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of the printer ......................223

Utility Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................568

Utility Sheet (Windows) ..........................................525

V

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing

Application (Mac OS 9) .......................................... 611


Application (Mac OS X) ..........................................582


Application (Windows) ............................................556

W

When to Replace Ink Tanks ....................................690

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink .........................................690

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen ......................................690

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen ......................................690

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ........714

If a message for checking the Maintenance

Display Screen .................................................714

If a message for the Maintenance Display

Screen ..............................................................714

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted ..........................................714

Windows .................................................................506

X x printhead error (x is Left or Right) ........................780

x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) ......779

796 Index

©CANON INC. 2007